Yamaha Stereo Amplifier DSP AX863SE User Manual

B
DSP-AX863SE  
AV Amplifier  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
INTRODUCTION  
ADVANCED OPERATION  
PREPARATION  
Optimizing the speaker setting  
BASIC OPERATION  
Selecting the desired SCENE template  
Selecting audio input jacks  
(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 43  
Displaying the current status of this unit  
Playing video sources in the background  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION  
APPENDIX  
of an audio source................................................ 44  
Enjoying unprocessed input sources  
(at the end of this manual)  
Front panel................................................................i  
Remote control ....................................................... ii  
List of remote control codes ................................. iii  
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter  
A
5
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the name  
of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to  
the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for  
the information about each position of the parts.  
1 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
Features  
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier  
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
Minimum RMS output power  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )  
Front: 105 W + 105 W  
HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or  
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio  
based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI  
Licensing LLC.)  
Center: 105 W  
Surround: 105 W + 105 W  
Surround back: 105 W + 105 W  
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)  
information capability  
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability  
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability  
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals  
capability  
SCENE function  
Preset SCENE templates for various situations  
SCENE templates for customizing capability  
Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support  
component (some models only) working with the SCENE  
function  
– High definition digital audio format signals capability  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)  
licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.  
Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion  
(composite video S-video component video HDMI  
digital video) capability for monitor out  
Sound field programs  
Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound  
fields  
Compressed Music Enhancer mode  
Virtual CINEMA DSP  
Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or  
480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p  
SILENT CINEMA  
DOCK terminal  
DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock  
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such  
as YBA-10, sold separately)  
Digital audio decoders  
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder  
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
decoder  
Other features  
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder  
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder  
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
decoder  
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for  
automatic speaker setup  
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter  
OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize  
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system  
5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-  
channel input  
Component video input/output capability includes  
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)  
Digital video signal conversion (composite video S-video  
component video) capability for monitor out  
Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources  
Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability  
Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability  
iPod controlling capability  
Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning,  
and macro capability  
Bi-amplification connection capability  
Sleep timer  
Supplied accessories  
Check that you received all of the following parts.  
Remote control  
Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4)  
Optimizer microphone  
2 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notice  
Notice  
About this manual  
y indicates a tip for your operation.  
• Some operations can be performed by using either the  
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote  
control. In case the button names differ between the front  
panel and the remote control, the button name on the  
remote control is given in parentheses.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and  
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of  
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the  
manual and product, the product has priority.  
A
5
• “ SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the  
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.  
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this  
manual for the information about each position of the  
parts.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:  
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535  
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a  
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and  
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007  
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
• The symbol “” with page number(s) indicates the  
corresponding reference page(s).  
iPod™  
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is  
used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.  
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
x.v.Color™  
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.  
3 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GETTING STARTED  
Getting started  
Installing batteries in the remote control  
2
1
3
1
2
Press the  
compartment cover off.  
part and slide the battery  
Insert the four supplied batteries  
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity  
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the  
battery compartment.  
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.  
Notes  
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following  
conditions:  
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.  
2
– the transmit indicator ( ) does not flash or its light becomes  
dim.  
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.  
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and  
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as  
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and  
color.  
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid  
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with  
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before  
installing new batteries.  
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose  
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.  
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2  
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,  
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory  
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code  
and program any acquired functions that may have been  
cleared.  
4 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Quick start guide  
Quick start guide  
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. See pages 11 to 15 for  
details of the speaker placement.  
Front right  
speaker  
Preparation: Check the items  
Prepare the following items.  
Video monitor  
Subwoofer  
Front left  
speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Speakers  
Front speakers ...................................x 2  
Center speaker ..................................x 1  
Surround speakers ............................x 4  
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The  
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.  
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is  
as follows:  
Center  
speaker  
Surroundback  
right speaker  
DVD player  
Surround back left  
speaker  
1. Two surround speakers  
2. Center speaker  
Surround left  
speaker  
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)  
Active subwoofer ...................................x 1  
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA  
input jack.  
Speaker cables .......................................x 7  
Subwoofer cable ....................................x 1  
Select a monaural RCA cable.  
DVD player ..............................................x 1  
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital  
audio output jack and composite video output  
jack.  
Video monitor .........................................x 1  
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector  
equipped with a composite video input jack.  
Video cable .............................................x 2  
Select an RCA composite video cable.  
Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1  
y
You can also connect two subwoofers to this unit. In this  
case, prepare two active subwoofers and subwoofer cables.  
Enjoy DVD playback!  
5 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel  
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.  
Step 1: Set up your speakers  
Front speakers and center speaker  
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this  
unit.  
PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 jack  
Loosen  
Insert  
Tighten  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (8CH)  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S
DVD  
VIDEO  
DTV/CBL  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
DVR VCR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
1
2
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
TUNER  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
AC OUTLETS  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
REMOTE OUT  
SINGLE  
Speaker terminals  
1
2
Place your speakers and subwoofer in the  
room.  
To the front right  
speaker  
To the center speaker  
To the front left  
speaker  
Connect speaker cables to each speaker.  
Surround and surround back speakers  
To the surround  
back left speaker  
To the surround  
right speaker  
Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.  
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a  
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)  
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.  
Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.  
To the surround  
left speaker  
To the surround  
back right speaker  
4
Connect the subwoofer cable to the  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack of this unit  
and the input jack of the subwoofer.  
3
Connect each speaker cable to the  
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.  
Subwoofer  
AV amplifier  
E
VID  
DOCK  
1
2
3
4
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
CENTER  
D
S VI  
D
DV  
1
2
OOFER  
SUBW  
CK  
BA  
SUR.  
D
UN  
RRO  
1
Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are  
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.  
Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables  
together to prevent short circuits.  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each  
other.  
Input jack  
2
3
4
SUBWOOFER PRE  
OUT 1 jack  
Subwoofer cable  
y
You can also connect another subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT 2 jack.  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any  
metal part of this unit.  
6 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
y
• When you connect a component that has only a SCART  
jack, use an appropriate converter. The connection  
between a converter and this unit depends on signals that  
are available on the converter. For details, refer to the  
instructions of your converter.  
Step 2: Connect your DVD player  
and other components  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack  
• This unit cannot transmit RGB signals.  
DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack  
DVD VIDEO jack  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (8CH)  
CENTER  
L
3
Connect the video cable to the VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video  
input jack of your video monitor.  
GND  
R
S
DVD  
VIDEO  
DTV/CBL  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
DVR VCR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
2
DVD  
3
OPTICAL  
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
1
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
OUT  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
TUNER  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
R
L
AC OUTLETS  
AV amplifier  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
Video monitor  
REMOTE OUT  
SINGLE  
VIDEO  
M
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
IN  
R
DV  
ONENT VIDEBO  
DTV/CBL  
COMP  
Y
Y
P
B
D
DV  
P
B
P
R
Make sure that this unit and the DVD  
player are unplugged from the AC  
wall outlets.  
R
C
Video input jack  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
jack  
Video cable  
1
Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the  
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD  
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL  
jack of this unit.  
4
Connect the power plug of this unit and other  
components into the AC wall outlet.  
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET for the power  
supply of the other components. See page 27 for details.  
AV amplifier  
M
DVD player  
H
ONT (8C  
FR  
DIO  
AU  
For further connections  
T
OU  
H
IN  
SB (8C  
T
OU  
VCR  
IN  
R
DV  
OUT  
(REC)  
D/  
DTV/CBL  
D
DV  
D-R  
Using the other kind of speaker combinations  
Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the  
connection P. 20  
Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the  
connection P. 21  
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video  
D
D
6
DV  
IN1  
DV  
CD  
5
DTV/CBL  
4
D
DV  
3
AXIAL  
R
CO  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
OPTICAL  
SU  
AL INPUT  
DIGIT  
A
R
ONT B/ZONE B/  
FR  
NCE  
L
L
ZONE 2/PRESE  
EXTRA SP  
R
Digital coaxial  
audio output  
jack  
DVD DIGITAL  
INPUT COAXIAL  
jack  
Digital coaxial audio  
cable  
recorder  
Connecting a set-top box  
2
Connect the video cable to the composite  
video output jack of your DVD player and  
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.  
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, tuner, or  
a turntable  
Connecting an external amplifier  
DVD player  
AV amplifier  
Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel  
audio connection P. 25  
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
DOCK  
OUT  
IN  
DEO  
R
DV  
DTV/CBL  
V
MPONENT  
CO  
Bluetooth adapter  
D
DV  
P
B
P
R
Y
A
P
R
Using the REMOTE OUT jacks  
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel  
Composite  
video output  
jack  
DVD VIDEO jack  
Video cable  
7 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
About SCENE function  
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button  
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this  
unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field  
program according to the SCENE template that has been  
assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are  
built combinations of input sources and sound field  
programs.  
Check the type of the connected speakers.  
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to  
“6MIN” before using this unit (see page 27). 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see  
y
If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the  
SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the  
component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of  
the DVD player for further information.  
1
Turn on the video monitor and then set the  
input source selector of the video monitor to  
this unit.  
The default assigned SCENE templates  
Default  
SCENE  
button  
The name of the SCENE template  
and its description  
J
2
Press SCENE1 button.  
This unit is turned on. “DVD Movie Viewing”  
appears in the front panel display, and this unit  
automatically optimize own status for the DVD  
playback.  
DVD Movie Viewing  
– input source: DVD  
– sound field program: Sci-Fi  
For when you want to enjoy a movie from the  
connected DVD player.  
SCENE  
1
Music Disc Listening  
– input source: DVD  
SCENE  
2
– sound field program: 2ch Stereo  
For when you want to listen to a music disc from  
the connected DVD player.  
SCENE  
3
TV Viewing *1  
– input source: DTV/CBL  
– sound field program: Straight  
For when you want to watch a TV program.  
Radio Listening *2  
– input source: TUNER  
SCENE  
4
– sound field program: 7ch Enhancer  
For when you want to listen to a music program  
of the FM/AM/DAB radio station.  
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while  
this unit is in the SCENE mode.  
Notes  
B
Rotate VOLUME to adjust the volume.  
3
*1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in  
advance. See page 22 for details.  
*2 You must connect an FM/AM/DAB tuner to this unit in  
advance. See page 23 for details.  
y
You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE  
buttons. See page 36 for details.  
Note  
When you change the input source or sound field program,  
the SCENE mode is deactivated.  
8 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Quick start guide  
After using this unit...  
What do you want to do with this  
unit?  
CSTANDBY/ON  
Press  
to set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
Customizing the SCENE templates  
Using various SCENE templates  
Creating your original SCENE templates  
Using various input sources  
Basic controls of this unit  
Using your iPod with this unit  
Using the Bluetooth components  
Using various sound features  
Using various sound field programs  
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small  
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from  
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby  
Using the pure direct mode for high  
fidelity sound  
J
mode, press the desired SCENE buttons  
CSTANDBY/ON  
Customizing the sound field programs  
4
(or SCENE) or  
E
(or POWER).  
Adjusting the parameters of this unit  
Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters  
for your listening room  
(AUTO SETUP)  
Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit  
Setting the remote control  
Adjusting the advanced parameters  
Additional feature  
Automatically turning off this unit  
9 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Connections  
Rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (6CH)  
SINGLE  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S VIDEO  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT  
COAXIAL  
R
TUNER  
SPEAKERS  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
AC OUTLET  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
REMOTE OUT  
SINGLE  
6
7
8
9
0
Name  
Page  
21  
1
AUDIO jacks  
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks  
PRE OUT jacks  
2
3
4
5
25  
DOCK terminal  
17-22  
Video component jacks  
(VIDEO and S VIDEO)  
17-22  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks  
TUNER jacks  
6
7
8
9
0
26  
REMOTE OUT jack  
Speaker terminals  
HDMI jacks  
18  
AC OUTLET  
10 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Placing speakers  
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and  
multi-channel audio sources.  
7.1-channel speaker layout  
7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 14  
for connection information.  
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 13 for  
details.  
C
FL  
FR  
FR  
SW  
FL  
SR  
30˚  
C
SL  
SL  
SR  
SR  
SL  
60˚  
SW  
SBR  
80˚  
SBR  
SBL  
SBL  
30 cm (12 in) or more  
Speaker indications  
FL/FR: Front left/right  
C: Center  
SL/SR: Surround left/right  
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right  
SW: Subwoofer  
Front left and right speakers  
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the  
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.  
Center speaker  
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a  
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.  
Surround left and right speakers  
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.  
Surround back left and right speakers  
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.  
Subwoofer(s)  
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is  
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity  
sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. You can connect one or  
two subwoofer(s) to this unit. When you use two subwoofers, you can enjoy deeper bass sound. The position of the  
subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer  
near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.  
y
When you use two subwoofers, select the same type of the subwoofer as another and set these subwoofers as same sound characteristics.  
Place each subwoofer at the same distance from the listening position. The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack is the  
same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.  
11 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
6.1-channel speaker layout  
5.1-channel speaker layout  
See page 14 for connection information.  
y
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the  
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See  
page 13 for details.  
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the  
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See  
page 13 for details.  
FR  
FR  
SW  
SW  
FL  
SR  
FL  
C
C
SR  
SL  
SW  
SW  
SB  
SL  
Speaker indications  
Speaker indications  
C
C
FL  
FR  
FL  
FR  
FL/FR: Front left/right  
C: Center  
SL/SR: Surround left/right  
SB: Surround back  
SW: Subwoofer  
FL/FR: Front left/right  
C: Center  
SL/SR: Surround left/right  
SW: Subwoofer  
30˚  
30˚  
60˚  
SL  
SL  
SR  
SR  
SL  
SL  
SR  
SR  
60˚  
80˚  
80˚  
SB  
Front left and right speakers  
Center speaker  
Front left and right speakers  
Center speaker  
Surround left and right speakers  
Subwoofer(s)  
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as  
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).  
Subwoofer(s)  
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as  
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).  
Surround left and right speakers  
Surround back speaker  
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND  
speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers  
behind the listening position. For the smooth and  
unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place  
the surround left and right speakers farther back compared  
with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The  
surround back channel signals are directed to the surround  
left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to  
Connect a single surround speakers to the SURROUND  
BACK SINGLE speaker terminal and place the single  
surround back speaker behind the listening position. The  
surround back left and right channel signals are mixed  
down and output at the single surround back speaker when  
you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see  
For other speaker combinations  
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/  
6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.  
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 31) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see  
page 68) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.  
12 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Using presence speakers  
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects  
produced by the sound field programs (see page 47). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the  
presence speakers (see page 57).  
To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the EXTRA SP terminal (see page 14) and set “EXTRA SP  
ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 32 and 68).  
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)  
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)  
Speaker indications  
FL: Front left  
FR: Front right  
PL  
PR  
C: Center  
PL: Front presence left  
PR: Front presence right  
1.8 m  
(6 ft) or  
higher  
1.8 m  
(6 ft) or  
higher  
FL  
FR  
C
13 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Connecting speakers  
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,  
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.  
Caution  
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage  
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front  
panel display when you turn on this unit.  
Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the  
speakers away from the monitor.  
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6MIN” before using this unit (see page 27). 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers. For details about the speaker impedance setting, see page 95.  
Note  
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,  
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable  
to the “–” (black) terminals.  
For the 7.1-channel speaker setting  
EXTRA SP terminals  
Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), front speaker systems in another room  
(ZONE B), or presence speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA  
SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 68).  
Subwoofers  
(optional)  
y
You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (6CH)  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S VIDEO  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
C
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
PB  
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
TUNER  
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
R
L
AC OUTLET  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
REMOTE OUT  
SINGLE  
Center speaker  
Left  
Right  
Left  
Right  
Left  
Front speakers  
(FRONT A)  
Right  
Surround speakers  
Surround back speakers  
14 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connections  
For the 6.1-channel speaker setting  
Center speaker  
EXTRA SP terminals  
(optional)  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
FRONT (8CH)  
CENTER  
N
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
LAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
HDMI  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
Subwoofers  
D/CD-R  
2
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
SINGLE  
Right  
Left  
Left (SINGLE)  
Right  
Left  
Surround speakers  
Surround back speaker  
Front speakers  
(FRONT A)  
For the 5.1-channel speaker setting  
Center speaker  
EXTRA SP terminals  
(optional)  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
FRONT (6CH)  
CENTER  
N
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
AY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
HDMI  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
Subwoofers  
/CD-R  
2
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
SINGLE  
Right  
Left  
Right  
Left  
Surround speakers  
Front speakers  
(FRONT A)  
15 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connections  
Connecting the speaker cable  
Using bi-amplification connections  
Caution  
1
Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation  
from the end of each speaker cable and then  
twist the exposed wires of the cable together  
to prevent short circuits.  
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers  
to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high  
pass filter) crossovers.  
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections  
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-  
amplification.  
10 mm  
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT  
and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown  
below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set  
“BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see  
page 97).  
2
Loosen the knob.  
Front speakers  
Left  
Right  
Red: positive (+)  
FRONT  
A
SURROUND BACK/  
BI-AMP  
R
L
R
SINGLE L  
Black: negative (–)  
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side  
of each terminal.  
This unit  
Note  
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the  
shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the  
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.  
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.  
16 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Information on jacks and cable plugs  
Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.  
Audio jacks and cable plugs  
Video jacks and cable plugs  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
PR  
PB  
Y
L
R
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
(Yellow)  
(Red)  
(Blue) (Green)  
(White)  
(Red)  
(Orange)  
S
O
V
PR  
PB  
Y
L
R
C
Left and right  
analog audio  
cable plugs  
Coaxial  
digital audio  
cable plug  
Optical  
digital  
audio cable  
plug  
Composite  
video cable  
plug  
S-video  
cable plug  
Component  
video cable  
plugs  
Audio jacks  
Video jacks  
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other  
components.  
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video  
monitor.  
AUDIO jacks  
VIDEO jacks  
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left  
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the  
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.  
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via  
composite video cables.  
S VIDEO jacks  
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital  
audio cables.  
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and  
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate  
wires of S-video cables.  
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital  
audio cables.  
For component video signals, separated into the  
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals  
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.  
Note  
y
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and  
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the  
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals  
input at the COAXIAL jack. Optical input jacks are compatible  
with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.  
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See  
pages 19 and 79 for details.  
17 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Connections  
Information on HDMI™  
Video signals  
HDMI signal compatibility  
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the  
following resolutions:  
Audio signals  
Audio signal  
types  
Audio signal  
formats  
Compatible  
media  
Video signal format  
– 480i/60 Hz  
2ch Linear  
PCM  
2ch, 32-192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit  
CD, DVD-Video,  
DVD-Audio, etc.  
– 576i/50 Hz  
– 480p/60 Hz  
– 576p/50 Hz  
Multi-ch  
Linear PCM  
8ch, 32-192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit  
DVD-Audio, Blu-  
ray Disc, HD DVD,  
etc.  
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz  
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz  
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz  
DSD  
2/5.1ch,  
SA-CD, etc.  
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit  
Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks  
Bitstream  
Dolby Digital,  
DTS  
DVD-Video, etc.  
HDMI input jack  
IN1  
Assigned input source  
DVD  
Bitstream (High Dolby TrueHD,  
definition audio) Dolby Digital Plus,  
DTS-HD Master  
Blu-ray Disc,  
HD DVD, etc.  
IN2  
IN3  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
Audio, DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio,  
DTS Express  
HDMI jack and cable plug  
HDMI  
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio  
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio  
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the  
following connections:  
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 25)  
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)  
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source  
component, and set the component appropriately.  
HDMI cable plug  
Notes  
y
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video  
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of  
the DVD player.  
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or  
DVI components.  
• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5  
meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.  
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack DVI-D jack) to connect  
this unit to other DVI components.  
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input  
source component appropriately so that the component outputs  
the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the  
bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied  
instruction manuals for details.  
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features  
(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet)  
of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the  
audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.  
Notes  
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of  
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of  
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt  
playback or cause noise.  
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the  
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to  
establish the connection to the component.  
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video  
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be  
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”  
in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79) to activate this feature.  
18 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Audio and video signal flow  
Audio signal flow  
Video signal flow  
Input  
Output  
Input  
Output  
HDMI  
HDMI  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(COAXIAL)  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(OPTICAL)  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Digital output  
Analog output  
Through  
Video conversion ON (see page 79)  
Notes  
Notes  
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and  
DTS signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks can be output at  
the HDMI OUT jack only when “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”  
• When the video signals are input at the HDMI, COMPONENT  
VIDEO, S VIDEO, and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the  
input signals is as follows:  
1. HDMI  
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the  
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.  
2. COMPONENT VIDEO  
3. S VIDEO  
4. VIDEO  
• Digital video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks cannot  
be output from analog video output jacks.  
• The analog component video signals with  
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the  
S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.  
• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution  
are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
jacks.  
• Use the “HDMI RES.” parameter in “VIDEO SET” to  
deinterlace and convert the resolution of the analog video  
signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 80).  
19 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting a TV monitor or projector  
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,  
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the  
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.  
• When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source,  
connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and  
digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit. Refer to  
“Connecting a set-top box” on page 22 for connecting  
information.  
Notes  
Make sure that this unit and other  
components are unplugged from the  
AC wall outlets.  
• If a video monitor is connected to this unit via a DVI  
connection, you may not take full advantage of the HDMI  
features.  
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI  
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals  
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the  
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.  
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic  
audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync  
feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing  
automatically (see page 75). Connect the video monitor to the  
HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.  
y
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or  
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT  
jack of this unit. Use the “S.AUDIO” parameter in “OPTION  
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio  
signals (see page 82).  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (6CH)  
CENTER  
S VIDEO  
MD/ OUT  
Y) CD-R (REC)  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
D-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
AC OUTLET  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
SINGLE  
O
Optical out  
S
Y
PB  
PR  
HDMI in  
V
Component video in  
S-video in  
Video in  
TV (or projector)  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
(One for the video connection, and one for the  
audio connection)  
20 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting other components  
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 79), the  
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT  
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video  
connections between each component.  
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the  
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or  
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for  
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O  
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).  
Make sure that this unit and other  
components are unplugged from the  
AC wall outlets.  
Notes  
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT  
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,  
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
• When “VIDEO CONV.is set to “OFF” (see page 79), be sure  
to make the same type of video connections as those made for  
your TV (see page 20). For example, if you connected your TV  
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your  
other components to the VIDEO jacks.  
Connecting a DVD player  
DVD player  
S-video out  
Optical out  
Coaxial out  
Video out  
Component video out  
Audio out  
HDMI out  
L
R
C
PR  
PB  
Y
O
V
S
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (6CH)  
SINGLE  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S VIDEO  
DVD DTV/CBL  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
TUNER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
AC OUTLET  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
REMOTE OUT  
SINGLE  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
(One for the video connection, and one for the  
audio connection)  
21 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR  
VCR  
S-video out  
S-video in  
Video in  
Audio out  
Audio in  
Video out  
R
L
R
L
V
V
S
S
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
FRONT (8CH)  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S VIDEO  
DVD DTV/CBL  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
HDMI  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
TUNER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
S
S
V
V
L
R
L
R
Y
PB  
PR  
HDMI out  
Audio in  
S-video in  
Video in  
Audio out  
Component video out  
DVD recorder  
or PVR  
Connecting a set-top box  
Satellite receiver, cable  
TV receiver or HDTV  
decoder  
S-video out  
Video out  
Component video out  
Optical out  
Audio out  
R
L
Y
PB  
PR  
V
O
S
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
FRONT (8CH)  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CENTER  
L
GND  
R
S VIDEO  
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
1
2
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
HDMI  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
TUNER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
(One for the video connection, and one for the  
audio connection)  
22 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting audio components  
Notes  
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the  
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O  
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).  
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the  
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.  
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-  
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.  
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,  
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.  
CD recorder, MD  
recorder or tape deck  
Turntable  
Audio out  
Audio in  
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
O
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER  
FRONT (8CH)  
L
GND  
R
IN  
MD/ OUT  
SUB  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
FRO  
HDMI  
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
DVD  
IN1  
DTV/CBL  
IN2  
DVR  
IN3  
1
2
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
TUNER  
FRONT B/ZONE B/  
PRESENCE  
R
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/B  
R
EXTRA SP  
L
L
R
L
L
REMOTE OUT  
SIN  
L
R
L
R
C
Coaxial  
out  
Audio  
out  
Audio  
out  
TUNER  
CD player  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
(One for the audio connection)  
23 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connections  
Connecting an external amplifier  
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output  
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs  
the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.  
Notes  
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.  
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 51).  
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 51).  
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 68).  
5
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
CENTER  
L
R
1
2
FRONT SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
1
3
2
4
1
FRONT PRE OUT jacks  
Front channel output jacks.  
2
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks  
Surround channel output jacks.  
3
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks  
Surround back channel output jacks. When you only  
connect one external amplifier for the surround back  
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.  
Notes  
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front  
channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.  
• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks  
differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see  
4
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks  
Connect one or two subwoofers with a built-in amplifier.  
Note  
The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack is the  
same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.  
5
CENTER PRE OUT jack  
Center channel output jack.  
24 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Connections  
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder  
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and  
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-  
amplifier.  
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 78), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in  
“MULTI CH” (see page 78) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.  
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to  
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.  
Notes  
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 42), this unit automatically  
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.  
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that  
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.  
MULTI CH INPUT  
FRONT (6CH)  
MULTI CH INPUT  
FRONT (6CH)  
CENTER  
CENTER  
L
L
L
*1  
R
R
R
SUB  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
SUB  
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player/External  
decoder (5.1-channel output)  
Multi-format player/External  
decoder (7.1-channel output)  
*1 The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH” (see page 78).  
y
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal  
Refer to “Using iPod™” on page 52 for playback of your iPod  
your Bluetooth components.  
dock or Bluetooth adapter  
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear  
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal  
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth  
adapter (such as YBA-10 sold separately). Connect a  
Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the  
DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its  
dedicated cable.  
DOCK  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
B
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
Yamaha iPod universal dock  
or Bluetooth adapter  
25 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connections  
Using REMOTE OUT jacks  
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the  
front panel  
Connect the component which is the Yamaha product and  
have the capability of the SCENE control signals to the  
REMOTE OUT jack as follows.  
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a  
game console or a video camera to this unit.  
Caution  
REMOTE OUT  
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other  
components before making connections.  
Notes  
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel  
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.  
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select  
V-AUX” as the input source.  
Remote  
control in  
VOLUME  
Infrared signal  
receiver or Yamaha  
component  
SPEAKERS  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
y
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control  
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding  
components and start the playback when you use one of the  
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about  
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.  
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not  
the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup  
menu to “OFF” (see page 97).  
VIDEO  
L
OPTICAL  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
S
V
O
L
R
Game console or  
video camera  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
(One for the video connection, and  
one for the audio connection)  
26 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting the power cable  
Setting the speaker impedance  
Caution  
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to  
“6MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers.  
C
MONITOR OUT  
DVR  
AC OUTLET  
SWITCHED  
100W MAX.  
0.4A MAX.  
1
Make sure this unit turned off.  
See page 28 for details.  
D
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and  
2
C
then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this  
unit.  
To the AC wall outlet  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
While holding  
TONE CONTROL  
AC OUTLET (SWITCHED)  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Use this outlet to supply power to any connected  
components. Connect the power cable of your other  
components to this outlet. Power to this outlet is supplied  
when this unit is turned on. However, power to this outlet  
is cut off when this unit is turned off or when  
E
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select  
“SP IMP.”.  
3
C
STANDBY/ON on the front panel is pressed. For  
“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting  
(“8MIN”) appear in the front panel display.  
information on the maximum power or the total power  
consumption of the components that can be connected to  
D
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to  
4
5
Note  
select “6MIN”.  
The power to AC OUTLET of this unit is not cut off while this  
unit is charging connected iPod even when this unit is in the  
standby mode. When this unit completes charging or the iPod is  
disconnected, the power is cut off automatically when this unit is  
in the standby mode.  
C
Press STANDBY/ON to save the new  
setting and turn off this unit.  
Note  
Memory back-up  
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this  
unit.  
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data  
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.  
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power  
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the  
power supply is cut off for more than one week.  
27 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connections  
Turning this unit on and off  
Turning on this unit  
C
E
Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn  
on this unit.  
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be delay for a few  
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.  
J
You can also turn on this unit by pressing SCENE (or  
4
SCENE) buttons.  
Set this unit to the standby mode  
C
D
Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set  
this unit to the standby mode.  
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of  
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote  
control.  
28 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Front panel display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH  
VCR  
qEX  
DIGITAL PLUS  
TRUE HD  
PL x  
DVR  
V-AUX  
DTV/CBL  
DVD  
MD/CD-R CD  
YPAO  
TUNER  
PHONO  
DOCK  
ENHANCER  
VOL.  
ADAPTIVE DRC  
q
q
q
MASTER AUDIO  
VIRTUAL  
SLEEP  
SP  
AB  
dB  
MUTE  
HD  
96  
SILENT CINEMA  
96/24  
LFE  
ES 24  
LL C R  
SL SB SR  
MATRIX DISCRETE  
SBL  
SBR  
PCM DSD  
9
0
A B  
C
D
E
F
G
1
8
HDMI indicator  
MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator  
The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function  
is on (see page 44).  
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is  
input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 18).  
Indicates the current volume level.  
2
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator  
9
Input signal indicators  
Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control  
feature is turned on (see page 72).  
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code  
Modulation) or DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio  
signals.  
3
DOCK indicator  
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha  
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)  
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see  
page 25) and V-AUX is selected as the input source.  
The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is  
charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the  
standby mode.  
0
Decoder indicators  
The respective indicator lights up when any of the  
decoders of this unit function.  
A
Sound field indicators  
Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 47).  
Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter  
(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth  
component is in the paring or the Bluetooth adapter is  
searching the Bluetooth component (see page 54).  
Light up while the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter is  
connected to the Bluetooth component (see page 54).  
Presence sound field  
Listening position  
Surround left  
sound field  
Surround right  
sound field  
Surround back sound field  
4
ENHANCER indicator  
B
Headphone indicator  
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is  
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 44).  
C
SP A B indicators  
5
Input source indicators  
Light up according to the set of front speakers activated  
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently  
selected input source.  
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.  
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.  
SP A B: The FRONT A and FRONT B speakers are  
activated.  
6
YPAO indicator  
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the  
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without  
any modifications (see page 31).  
D
DSP indicators  
7
96/24 indicator  
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound  
field programs are selected (see page 47).  
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.  
CINEMA DSP indicator  
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound  
29 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Connections  
VIRTUAL indicator  
Using the remote control  
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.  
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote  
control sensor on this unit during operation.  
Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is  
SILENT CINEMA indicator  
Lights up when headphones are connected and a  
sound field program is selected (see page 50).  
Remote control sensor  
E
Multi-information display  
Shows the name of the current sound field program and  
other information when adjusting or changing settings.  
F
SLEEP indicator  
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 46).  
G
Input channel and speaker indicators  
Approximately 6 m  
LFE indicator  
30  
30  
LFE  
LL C R  
SL SB SR  
Presence speaker indicators  
Input channel indicators  
SBL  
SBR  
Input channel indicators  
• Indicate the channel components of the current  
digital input signal.  
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the  
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup  
procedure (see page 31) or in the “BASIC MENU”  
1
Infrared window (  
)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the  
component you want to operate.  
2
Transmit indicator (  
)
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared  
signals.  
Presence speaker indicators  
6
Display window (  
)
Light up or flash according to the setting of “EXTRA  
SP ASSIGN” when this unit is in the automatic setup  
procedure (see page 31) or in the “BASIC MENU” in  
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can  
control.  
F
Operation mode selector (  
)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation  
mode selector position.  
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back  
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see  
page 31) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR.B L/R  
SP” (see page 69) in “SPEAKER SET”.  
AMP  
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.  
SOURCE  
Operates the component selected with an input  
selector button (see page 84).  
TV  
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or  
Notes  
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.  
• Do not drop the remote control.  
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types  
of conditions:  
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath  
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove  
– places of extremely low temperatures  
– dusty places  
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see  
30 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM (YPAO)  
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)  
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid  
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied  
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening  
environment.  
Using AUTO SETUP  
2
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
“MIC ON View OSD menu” appears in the front  
panel display.  
Notes  
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output  
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as  
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If  
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be  
satisfactory.  
VIDEO AUX  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
y
• Initial settings are indicated in bold.  
You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that  
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual  
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
Omni-directional  
microphone  
• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector  
F
on the remote control to AMP.  
The following menu screen appears on the video  
monitor.  
• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker  
terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
. EXTRAꢀSPꢀASSIGNꢀꢀ  
>FRONTꢀB ZONEꢀB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀPRESENCEꢀNONEꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
1
Make sure of the following check points.  
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO  
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL  
START  
Note  
Before starting the automatic setup, check the following  
check points.  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Selectꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
[
[
Speakers are connected appropriately.  
Headphones are disconnected from this unit.  
This unit and the video monitor are turned on.  
This unit is selected as the video input source of  
the video monitor.  
The connected subwoofer is turned on and the  
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly  
less).  
3
Place the optimizer microphone at your  
normal listening position on a flat level  
surface with the omni-directional  
microphone heading upward.  
Optimizer microphone  
The crossover frequency controls of the  
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.  
CROSSOVER  
HIGH CUT  
VOLUME  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
Controls of a subwoofer (example)  
y
The room is sufficiently quiet.  
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the  
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would  
be when you are seated in your listening position. You can  
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer  
microphone to the tripod (etc.).  
y
If you connect two subwoofers to this unit, the volume level  
of each subwoofer is set to slightly less.  
31 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)  
Notes  
9
Press l / h to select the desired setting  
4
9
for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press n.  
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have  
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.  
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change  
the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see  
page 97) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “BASIC MENU”  
Extra speaker assignment  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the  
EXTRA SP terminals.  
Choices: FRONT B, ZONE B,  
PRESENCE, NONE  
9
Press l / h to select the desired setting of  
“EQ”.  
6
• When you use the alternative front speaker  
Select “FRONT B”.  
Parametric equalizer type EQ  
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified  
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the  
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and  
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to  
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can  
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment  
from the following choices.  
• When you want to use another front  
speaker system in Zone B  
Select “ZONE B”.  
• When you use the presence speakers (see  
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT  
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the  
speakers to the presence speakers.  
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency  
response of all speakers with higher frequencies  
being all speakers to achieve more natural sound.  
Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little  
harsh.  
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response  
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your  
speakers are of similar quality.  
• When you do not use the EXTRA SP  
terminals  
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP  
terminals.  
Note  
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response  
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of  
your front speakers. Recommended if your front  
speakers are of much higher quality than your other  
speakers.  
If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 97), you cannot  
select “PRESENCE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.  
9
Press l / h to select “SETUP” and then  
9
press n.  
5
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT  
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO  
SETUP” settings and override the previous  
settings.  
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”  
settings and restore the previous settings.  
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”  
parameters to the initial factory settings.  
32 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)  
9
Press n to select “START” and then press  
7
9
Make sure that the following screen appears  
9
9
ENTER to start the setup procedure.  
and then press ENTER to display the  
The following message appears in the OSD.  
When this unit starts the automatic setup procedure,  
loud test tones are output at the speakers.  
result screen.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and  
move to the wall where speakers are not around. We  
recommend that you leave the listening room during  
the automatic setup procedure.  
Measurement Complete  
Press [ENTER]  
NOTICE  
Loudꢀtestꢀtonesꢀare  
ꢀꢀꢀoutput.  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
Pleaseꢀkeepꢀquiet  
orꢀleaveꢀtheꢀroom.  
. RESULT  
:
SP  
3/4/0.1  
Pressꢀ[ENTER]  
DIST: 4.50/5.30m  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts  
the automatic setup procedure.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Detail  
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as  
follows:  
9
Press ENTER to start the automatic setup  
8
procedure.  
Number of speakers SP  
Displays the number of speakers connected to this  
unit in the following order:  
The following screen appears in the OSD and setup  
procedure starts in 10 seconds.  
Front/Back/Subwoofer  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
Speaker distance DIST  
Displays the speaker distance from the listening  
position in the following order:  
MeasurementꢀStart  
inꢀ 9ꢀseconds  
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance  
[RETURN]:Cancel  
Speaker level LVL  
Displays the speaker output level in the following  
order:  
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output  
level  
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during  
the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the  
“RESULT” display appears in the OSD.  
Notes  
Notes  
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any  
operation on this unit.  
• The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack  
is the same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE  
OUT 1 jack. Therefore, even if you connect two  
subwoofers, the number of the connected subwoofer is  
indicated as “0.1”.  
• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit  
is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3  
minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.  
y
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing  
procedure, restart from step 4.  
9
Press k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.  
• If you selected other than “AUTO” in step 5, no test tones  
are output.  
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure,  
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen  
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on  
page 35.  
• When this unit detects potential problems during the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the  
number of warning messages appears in the above of  
“RESULT” (see page 35).  
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR  
PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic procedure  
and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see  
page 70) is automatically set to “REVERSE”.  
33 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)  
Notes  
9
10 Press ENTER to display the setup results  
in detail.  
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may  
be longer than the actual distance depending on the  
characteristics of your subwoofer.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the  
same frequency to provide finer adjustments.  
. RESULT  
SP  
DIST: 4.50/5.30m  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
:
3/4/0.1  
9
12 Press ENTER to return to the top  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Detail  
result display.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
RESULT  
WIRING  
RESULT  
SP  
DIST: 4.50/5.30m  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
:
3/4/0.1  
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK  
. >SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
[ ][ /[[]:Select  
[ENTER]:Return  
13 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”  
9
11 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between  
9
and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to  
the setup result displays.  
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.  
9
Press k / n to toggle between the parameters in a  
results.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
RESULT  
SP  
DIST: 4.50/5.30m  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
Results of the speaker  
connection and wiring  
(WIRING)  
:
3/4/0.1  
. >SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Choices: SET, CANCEL  
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”  
results.  
Results of the speaker distance  
from the listening position  
(DISTANCE)  
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”  
results.  
9
14 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.  
Results of the setting of each  
speaker size  
(SIZE)  
The following screen appears. Disconnect the  
optimizer microphone from this unit to exit from  
“SET MENU”. The optimizer microphone is  
sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight  
and do not place it on top of this unit.  
Results of the parametric  
equalizer of each speaker  
(EQ)  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
AUTOꢀSETUPꢀComplete  
Disconnect Microphone  
PRESS [ENTER]  
[MENU]:Exit  
y
Results of the speaker output level  
(LEVEL)  
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your  
listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate  
your system.  
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually  
adjust each parameter, use “MANUAL SETUP” (see  
34 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)  
If an error screen appears  
If “WARNING” appears  
When this unit detects potential problems during the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the  
top result display. Check the warning messages to correct  
your speaker settings.  
9
Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or  
9
“EXIT” and then press ENTER.  
The following display is an example when “E-9:USER  
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.  
Note  
ERROR  
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
. E-9:USER CANCEL  
Don't operate  
any function  
1
Make sure the pointer is pointing at  
>RETRY EXIT  
9
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to  
[ ][ /[[]:Select  
[ENTER]:Enter  
display the detailed information about the  
warning.  
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates  
the number of warning messages.  
Choices: RETRY, EXIT  
Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
AUTOꢀSETUP  
y
. WARNING(3)  
RESULT  
If “E-5:NOISY” appears, “PROCEED” also appears in the  
choices. When you select “PROCEED”, this unit continues the  
measurements and settings, but the settings may not be optimal.  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
DIST: 4.50/5.30m  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Detail  
9
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between  
the warning displays.  
2
WARNING  
W-1:OUTꢀOFꢀPHASE  
Reverse Channel  
FL  
--  
CENTER  
PL  
SL  
PR  
SR  
SBL  
[ ][ /[[]:Select  
SBR  
[ENTER]:Return  
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO  
• When the corresponding warning message is not  
applicable to a speaker, “––” is displayed instead.  
• If “SWFR: TOO LOUD” or “SWFR: TOO LOW” appears  
in the “W-3: LEVEL ERROR” display, adjust the volume  
level of the subwoofer(s).  
9
Press ENTER to return to the top result  
display.  
3
35 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES  
Selecting the SCENE templates  
This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for  
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory  
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to  
each SCENE button (see page 8):  
I
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the  
2
F
operation mode selector to AMP and then  
9
press l / h) to select the desired  
template.  
SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing  
SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening  
SCENE 3: TV Viewing  
SCENE 4: Radio Listening  
DVD Viewing  
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select  
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template  
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE  
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.  
J
4
3
Press the SCENE (or SCENE) button  
again to confirm the selection.  
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the  
SCENE button.  
Select the desired SCENE  
template  
1
or  
1
Remote control  
Front panel  
1
Assign the  
SCENE  
Note  
template to the  
SCENE button  
Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the  
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input  
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See  
page 40 for details.  
SCENE template library  
(Image)  
Selecting the desired SCENE  
template to the SCENE buttons  
J
4
1
Press and hold the SCENE (or SCENE)  
button for 3 seconds.  
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the  
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the  
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the  
front panel display.  
3 seconds  
3 seconds  
1
or  
1
Remote control  
Front panel  
1
Flashes  
DVD MovieꢀView  
36 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Which SCENE template would you like to select?  
Which source do you like to  
play back?  
Which component do you  
like for playback?  
Default  
SCENE templates  
DVD Viewing  
SCENE buttons  
DVD  
Video sources  
(DVD video,  
Recorded video)  
DVD Movie Viewing  
DVD Live Viewing  
DVR Viewing  
1
DVR  
DVD  
Music discs (CD,  
SA-CD or DVD-Audio)  
Disc Hi-fi Listening  
Music Disc Listening  
Disc Listening  
2
CD Hi-fi Listening  
CD Listening  
CD  
CD Music Listening  
4
Radio Listening  
Dock Listening  
TUNER  
Radio programs  
iPod or Bluetooth  
component  
*
DOCK  
3
DTV/CBL  
TV Viewing  
TV programs  
TV Sports Viewing  
*
Action Game Playing  
RPG Playing  
Video games  
Vinyl records  
V-AUX  
PHONO  
LP Record Listening  
Note  
*
When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit  
plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.  
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 39 for details.  
37 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Preset SCENE templates descriptions  
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.  
SCENE template  
DVD Viewing  
Input source  
Playback mode  
Straight  
Features  
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back general  
contents on the DVD player.  
DVD  
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on  
your DVD player.  
DVD  
MOVIE  
Sci-Fi  
DVD Movie Viewing  
1
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live  
video on your DVD player.  
DVD  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Music Video  
DVD Live Viewing  
DVR Viewing  
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on  
your digital video recorder.  
DVR  
MOVIE  
Drama  
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity  
sound of the music discs on your DVD player.  
DVD  
Pure Direct  
Disc Hi-fi Listening  
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs  
on your DVD player.  
DVD  
STEREO  
2ch Stereo  
Music Disc  
Listening  
2
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music  
sources on your DVD player as the background music.  
DVD  
STEREO  
7ch Stereo  
Disc Listening  
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity  
sound of the music discs on your CD player.  
CD  
Pure Direct  
CD Hi-fi Listening  
CD Listening  
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs  
on your CD player.  
CD  
STEREO  
7ch Stereo  
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source  
on your CD player as the background music.  
CD  
STEREO  
2ch Stereo  
CD Music Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy radio programs.  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
MUSIC ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
Radio Listening  
4
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on  
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or  
Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth  
adapter.  
MUSIC ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
Dock Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general  
programs on your TV.  
DTV/CBL  
Straight  
TV Viewing  
3
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs  
on your TV.  
DTV/CBL  
V-AUX  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Sports  
TV Sports Viewing  
Select this SCENE template when you play action games such  
as car racing and FPS games.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Action Game  
Action Game  
Playing  
Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing  
games.  
V-AUX  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Roleplaying Game  
RPG Playing  
Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl records  
on your turntable.  
PHONO  
Pure Direct  
LP Record Listening  
*
When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE  
OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.  
38 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Creating your original SCENE  
templates  
You can create your original SCENE templates for each  
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE  
templates to create the original SCENE templates.  
9
Press k / n to select the desired parameter  
9
of the SCENE template and then l / h to  
select the desired value of the selected  
parameter.  
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE  
template:  
3
Create an original SCENE  
template  
Select the desired SCENE  
template  
INPUT: The input source component.  
MODE: The active sound field programs,  
“Straight” or “Pure Direct” mode.  
i n w g V i D e V  
D
S C E N E :  
4
Press the SCENE button again to confirm  
the edit.  
4
D
: D V I N P U T  
S C E N E  
i n w g V i D e V D :  
SCENE template library  
(Image)  
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE  
template.  
Notes  
1
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the  
4
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input  
Assign the SCENE  
template to the  
SCENE button  
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See  
page 40 for details.  
You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE  
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,  
this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with  
the new one.  
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned  
SCENE button.  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
4
Press and hold the desired SCENE button  
for 3 seconds.  
Rename the SCENE templates  
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on  
the video monitor.  
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3  
9
then press ENTER.  
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
.pꢀDVDꢀMovieꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀ[  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT: ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀMODE:ꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀRENAMEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀ-DVDꢀMovieꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Renameꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀ[SCENE1]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:EXITꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Character  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[p]/[[]:Positionꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:CANCELꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
Note  
9
Press k / n to select the desired character.  
9
Press l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the  
space or the desired character.  
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not  
4
9
assigned to any of the SCENE buttons, press l / h  
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the  
menu screen.  
0
Press RETURN to cancel the new name.  
9
Press ENTER to confirm the new name.  
39 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature  
Controlling the input source  
components in the SCENE mode  
You can operate both this unit and the input source  
component by using the remote control. You must set the  
appropriate remote control code for each input source in  
Setting the input source of the  
customized SCENE template on the  
remote control  
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE  
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE  
template on the remote control to operate the input source  
component correctly.  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE.  
4
Press and hold the SCENE button and the  
5
desired input selector button ( ).  
1
4
Press the desired SCENE button on the  
remote control.  
1
2
The transmit indicator ( ) flashes twice.  
2
Keep holding down the buttons pressed in  
step 2 until “OK” appears in the display  
2
Press the desired buttons in the * area below  
to control the input source component of the  
selected SCENE template.  
6
window ( ) on the remote control.  
Note  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
If the setting of the input source is not successful, “NG”  
SCENE  
6
SCENE  
buttons  
appears in the display window ( ). In this case, repeat the  
setting procedure.  
1
2
3
4
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
SELECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
+
*
Set to  
SOURCE  
VOLUME  
TV  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
AUDIO  
SRCH MODE  
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
STRAIGHT  
RETURN  
MEMORY  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
REC  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
Note  
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 84  
for details of the function of each button.  
40 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PLAYBACK  
Playback  
Caution  
3
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source  
component.  
See page 52 for details about iPod operations.  
See page 54 for details about Bluetooth operations.  
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play  
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD  
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,  
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may  
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player  
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound  
output level of your CD player before you play back a  
CD encoded in DTS.  
B
G
4
Rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–  
to adjust the volume to the desired output  
level.  
)
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio  
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to  
“DTS” before the playback (see page 77).  
y
See page 51 to adjust the level of each speaker.  
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume  
level (see page 72).  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
E
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press  
5
Basic procedure  
one of the sound field program selector  
(O) repeatedly)  
buttons  
to select the desired  
sound field program.  
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
The name of the selected sound field program appears  
in the front panel display. See page 47 for details  
about sound field programs.  
y
See page 45 to display the input source information on the  
video monitor.  
I
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one  
5
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select  
2
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fi  
the desired input source.  
Currently selected sound field program  
The name of the currently selected input source  
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.  
Available input sources  
Note  
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the  
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is  
selected as the input source (see page 42).  
MULTI CH  
VCR  
DVR  
V-AUX  
DTV/CBL  
DVD  
MD/CD-R CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
ꢀ ꢀDVD  
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening  
preference, not merely on the name of the program.  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically  
selects the last sound field program used with the  
corresponding input source.  
Currently selected input source  
y
The corresponding input selector button on the remote  
control for the currently selected input source lights up for  
approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the  
remote control, showing which source component is  
currently being operated.  
• To display information about the currently selected sound  
field program in the OSD, see page 56 for details.  
41 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
Selecting the front speaker set  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT  
A and/or FRONT B) on or off.  
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT  
component  
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel  
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front  
speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or  
EXTRA SP speaker terminals.  
Use this feature to select the component connected to the  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 25) as the input  
source.  
The active front speaker set changes as follows.  
I
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “MULTI  
FRONT A  
OFF  
FRONT B  
P
CH” (or press MULTI CH IN).  
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.  
FRONT A  
and  
FRONT B  
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the  
parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 78).  
Notes  
Note  
• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, or “NONE”  
• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front  
speaker setting.  
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input  
source.  
Using the Zone B feature  
When you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see  
page 68), you can use the speakers connected to the  
EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).  
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel  
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.  
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in  
the main room are muted.  
Note  
If you select the sound field program and activate the Zone B  
speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see  
42 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
Displaying the current status of  
this unit on a video monitor  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
You can display the operating information of this unit on a  
video monitor.  
Selecting audio input jacks  
(AUDIO SELECT)  
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this  
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input  
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the  
same input source.  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
L
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.  
The current status screen appears in the OSD.  
y
• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to  
“AUTO” in most cases.  
You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by  
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀVOL:-40.0dB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMOVIEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀꢀHDMIꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
H
I
Press AUDIO SELECT (or AUDIO)  
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack  
select setting.  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[DISPLAY]:STATUSꢀOFF  
y
You can select the amount of time that the current status is  
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter  
in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).  
Available input sources  
MULTI CH  
VCR  
DVR  
V-AUX  
DTV/CBL  
DVD  
MD/CD-R CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
L
• To turn off the status screen, press DISPLAY again.  
ꢀA.SEL:ꢀAUTO  
Note  
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR and VCR VIDEO  
OUT jacks and will not be recorded.  
Currently selected audio input jack select setting  
AUDIO SELECT  
Function  
Automatically selects input signals in the  
following order:  
AUTO  
(1) HDMI  
(2) Digital signals  
(3) Analog signals  
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI  
signals are not input, no sound is output.  
HDMI  
Automatically selects input signals in the  
following order:  
COAX/OPT  
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL  
jack  
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL  
jack  
When no signals are input, no sound is  
output.  
Selects only analog signals. If no analog  
signals are input, no sound is output.  
ANALOG  
Note  
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks  
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,  
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when  
the HDMI IN jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in  
“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see  
page 76).  
43 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
Using your headphones  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo  
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on  
the front panel.  
Playing video sources in the  
background of an audio source  
You can combine a video image from a video source with  
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy  
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful  
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.  
VOLUME  
SPEAKERS  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
5
Press the input selector buttons ( ) on the  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
remote control to select a video source and then  
an audio source.  
TUNER  
Audio sources  
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
y
Video sources  
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode  
activates automatically (see page 50).  
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
Notes  
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the  
speaker terminals.  
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the  
left and right headphone channels.  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
PHONO  
Video sources  
Audio sources  
MULTI CH IN  
9
Muting the audio output  
G
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the  
y
You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see  
page 42). Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then  
press MULTI CH IN.  
• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the  
desired setting to select the default background video input  
source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 78).  
audio output.  
F
G
Press MUTE again to resume the audio output.  
P
y
B
G
You can also rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–) to  
resume the audio output.  
You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”  
parameter in “VOLUME MENU” (see page 72).  
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the  
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel  
display when the audio output is resumed.  
44 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Playback  
Video information  
Displaying the input source  
information  
You can display the audio and video information of the  
current input signal.  
Information  
Descriptions  
Type of the source video signals and  
the video signals output at the HDMI  
OUT jack of this unit.  
HDMI SIGNAL  
HDMI RES.  
Resolution of the input signal (analog  
or HDMI) and the output signal  
(HDMI). When input video signals are  
composite video or S-video signals,  
the input video signals are indicated as  
“Composite” or “S-Video”.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
1
H
and then press SET MENU on the remote  
control.  
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.  
Resolution of the analog video signals  
output at the COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.  
ANALOG RES.  
SET MENU  
.
;AUTO SETUP  
;MANUAL SETUP  
.A;SIGNAL INFO  
Error message for HDMI sources or  
connected HDMI devices.  
HDMI ERROR  
(HDMI MESSAGE)  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Note  
9
Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL  
9
INFO” and then press ENTER.  
2
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding  
information.  
The audio information about the input source appears  
in the OSD.  
HDMI error and message  
Message  
Cause  
The number of the connected HDMI  
components is over the limit.  
DEVICE OVER  
9
Press l / h to toggle between the audio  
and video information displays.  
3
4
HDCP authentication failed.  
HDCP ERROR  
Out of Res.  
Out of resolution. The connected monitor is  
not compatible with the resolution of the  
input video signal.  
H
Press SET MENU on the remote control  
again to exit from “SET MENU”.  
Audio information  
Information  
Descriptions  
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a  
digital signal, it automatically switches to  
analog input.  
FORMAT  
The number of samples per second taken from  
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.  
SAMPLING  
CHANNEL  
The number of source channels in the input  
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a  
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front  
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is  
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.  
The number of bits passing a given point per  
second.  
BITRATE  
FLAG  
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or  
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically  
switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).  
Note  
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding  
information.  
45 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
Playback  
Canceling the sleep timer  
Using the sleep timer  
M
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly  
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel  
display.  
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the  
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep  
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit  
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also  
automatically turns off any external components  
connected to the AC OUTLET (see page 27).  
Disappears  
Note  
SLEEP OFF  
Even if this unit is in the standby mode, this unit does not cut off  
the power to AC OUTLET while charging connected iPod (see  
page 27).  
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”  
disappears from the front panel display after a few  
seconds.  
y
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and  
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing  
M
then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the  
D
C
STANDBY (or STANDBY/ON) to set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
amount of time.  
M
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display  
changes as shown below.  
SLEEP 120min  
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min  
SLEEP 90min  
SLEEP 60min  
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the  
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is  
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel  
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field  
program.  
Flashes  
SLEEP  
ꢀSLEEP 120min.  
Lights up  
SLEEP  
ꢀꢀStraight  
46 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field programs  
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from  
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing  
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.  
Selecting sound field programs  
Notes  
E
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set the  
F
operation mode selector to AMP and then  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects  
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input  
source.  
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the  
input source (see page 42).  
press one of the sound field program selector  
O
buttons ( ) repeatedly).  
The name of the selected sound field program appears in  
the front panel display and in the OSD.  
• When you play back the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
sources, this unit does not activate any sound field program.  
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher  
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.  
Sound field program descriptions  
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.  
For audio music sources  
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend that you use the Pure Direct mode (see page 51).  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 68).  
CLASSICAL  
Program  
Descriptions  
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish  
wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful  
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the  
center left of the arena.  
Hall in Munich  
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is  
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all  
around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.  
Hall in Vienna  
Chamber  
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It  
offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.  
47 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Sound field programs  
LIVE/CLUB  
Program  
Descriptions  
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound  
field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.  
Cellar Club  
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The  
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.  
The Roxy Theatre  
The Bottom Line  
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The  
floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.  
For various sources  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 68).  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Program  
Descriptions  
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with  
enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned  
clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the  
listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.  
Sports  
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the  
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment  
with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of  
directions.  
Action Game  
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field  
effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of  
the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.  
Roleplaying Game  
Music Video  
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The  
listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the  
vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that  
reproduces the space of a big live hall.  
For movie sources  
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 61 for details.  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 68).  
MOVIE  
Program  
Descriptions  
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original  
acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the  
concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from  
the left, right and rear.  
Standard  
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.  
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an  
excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.  
Spectacle  
Sci-Fi  
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and  
special effects-featuring movies.  
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation  
between dialog, sound effects and background music.  
48 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Sound field programs  
Program  
Descriptions  
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.  
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded  
widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation  
between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.  
Adventure  
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious  
dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling,  
reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center  
positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.  
Drama  
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an  
atmosphere of a good old movie theater.  
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a  
comfortable space with a certain sound depth.  
Mono Movie  
Note  
The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
STEREO  
Program  
Descriptions  
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.  
2ch Stereo  
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit  
downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates  
a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.  
7ch Stereo  
The Compressed Music Enhancer  
MUSIC ENHANCER  
Program  
Descriptions  
Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or  
multi-channel compression artifacts.  
Straight Enhancer  
7ch Enhancer  
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.  
Surround decode mode  
SUR. DECODE  
Program  
Descriptions  
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on  
multi-channels. See page 61 for details.  
Sur. Decoder  
49 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Sound field programs  
Using sound field programs without  
surround speakers  
Before performing the following operation, set the operation  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)  
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA  
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates  
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.  
When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 69),  
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever  
you select a sound field program (see page 47).  
Enjoying unprocessed input  
sources (Straight decoding mode)  
When this unit is in the “Straight” mode, 2-channel stereo  
sources are output from only the front left and right  
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into  
the appropriate channels without any additional effect  
processing.  
Note  
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R  
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 69) in the following cases:  
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 42).  
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.  
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.  
F
K
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) to select  
“Straight”.  
Deactivating the “Straight” mode  
Enjoying multi-channel sources and  
sound field programs with headphones  
(SILENT CINEMA)  
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel  
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS  
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA  
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones  
to the PHONES jack while listening to sound field  
programs (see page 47). When activated, the SILENT  
CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
F
K
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) so that  
“Straight” disappears from the front panel  
display.  
The sound effect is turned back on.  
Notes  
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the  
input source (see page 42).  
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “Pure Direct” (see  
page 51) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or  
when this unit is in the “Straight” mode (see page 50).  
50 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
USING AUDIO FEATURES  
Using audio features  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound  
F
mode selector on the remote control to AMP.  
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity  
sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode  
is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with  
the least circuitry.  
Adjusting the speaker level  
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while  
listening to a music source. This is also possible when  
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.  
G
J
Press PURE DIRECT (or PURE DIRECT)  
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.  
G
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up  
Note  
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel  
display automatically dims.  
This operation will override the level adjustments made in  
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 31) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 70).  
Notes  
8
Press LEVEL on the remote control and  
1
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in  
the Pure Direct mode:  
– switching the sound field program  
– displaying the OSD  
9
then k / n repeatedly to select the speaker  
you want to adjust.  
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level  
settings)  
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)  
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this  
unit is turned off.  
Display  
FRONT L  
FRONT R  
CENTER  
SUR. L  
SUR. R  
SBL  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation  
is performed.  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Subwoofer  
Adjusting the tonal quality  
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for  
the front left and right speaker channels.  
SBR  
SWFR  
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
PRNS L  
PRNS R  
DTONE CONTROL  
on the front panel  
1
Press  
y
repeatedly to select the high-frequency  
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency  
response (BASS).  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the  
setting of the speakers.  
• When the video monitor is turned on, the “LEVEL”  
adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.  
E
2
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust  
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or  
the low-frequency response (BASS).  
Control range: –6 dB to +6 dB  
9
Press l / h to adjust the speaker output  
level.  
2
3
9
• Press h to increase the value.  
9
• Press l to decrease the value.  
Notes  
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB  
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency  
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround  
speakers may not match.  
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is  
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input  
source.  
8
Press LEVEL to turn off the speaker level  
adjustment display.  
51 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
USING IPOD™  
Using iPod™  
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the  
DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 25), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You  
can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts  
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 49).  
Notes  
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.  
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.  
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in  
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK  
indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the  
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.  
Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK  
terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or  
not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 77). The  
DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.  
Controlling iPod™  
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with  
the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).  
Remote control operation  
Controlling iPod in the simple remote  
mode  
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,  
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without  
the aid of the OSD of this unit.  
Before performing the following operations, set the operation  
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE and then  
5
press V-AUX/DOCK.  
y
Button  
Function  
You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod  
(some models only).  
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.  
9
ENTER  
k
Subsequent menu  
Menu up  
n
Menu down  
l
Previous menu  
Subsequent menu  
h
B
ll  
hh  
a
b
s
Search backward (Press and hold)  
Search forward (Press and hold)  
Skip forward  
Skip backward  
Stop  
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)  
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)  
p
Play (Menu browse mode)  
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)  
H
L
MENU  
Previous menu  
Display  
DISPLAY  
52 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using iPod™  
Shuffle Shuffle  
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in  
random order.  
Controlling iPod in the menu browse  
mode  
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod  
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD  
of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod  
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for  
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.  
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums  
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.  
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random  
order.  
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in  
random order.  
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front  
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in  
“OPTION MENU” (see page 79).  
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “  
” appears  
You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play  
information is displayed in the OSD by using the  
“OSD-SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).  
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.  
Repeat Repeat  
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a  
sequence of songs.  
Notes  
Choices: Off, One, All  
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.  
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front  
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are  
replaced with underscores “_”.  
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.  
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.  
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of  
songs.  
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in  
9
9
the OSD. Press ENTER or k / n repeatedly on the remote  
control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings.  
You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your  
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy  
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.  
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “  
1
All  
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of  
songs are being repeated.  
The function of the play information  
1
Set the operation mode selector to  
display  
F
L
SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on  
[1]  
[7]  
[8]  
the remote control.  
The following display appears in the OSD.  
iPodꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[Play]ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
All  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
ꢀ1ꢀ/ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFrankieꢀZipperꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMade-to-orderꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀRoadꢀtoꢀIndiaꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;ꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ0:51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-7:44ꢀꢀ  
iPod  
Top  
Playlists  
Artists  
Albums  
Songs  
Genres  
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
[9]  
Composers  
Settings  
[5]  
[6]  
[10]  
9
Press k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod  
2
[1] Playback status  
[2] Track number/total tracks  
[3] Artist name  
9
menu and then press ENTER to begin  
playback of the selected song.  
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums  
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),  
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)  
• Playlists > Songs  
[4] Song title  
[5] Progress bar  
• Artists > Albums > Songs  
[6] Elapsed time  
• Albums > Songs  
• Songs  
[7] Shuffle and repeat icons  
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs  
• Composers > Albums > Songs  
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat  
[8]  
(playback),  
(pausing),  
(search  
forward) and  
(search backward)  
[9] Name of the album  
[10] Remaining time  
53 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS  
Using Bluetooth™ components  
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and  
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between  
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your  
Bluetooth component in advance.  
Note  
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter  
and your Bluetooth™ component  
If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK  
terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front  
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth  
component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this  
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been  
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a  
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.  
panel display.  
4
5
Check that the Bluetooth component detects  
the Bluetooth adapter.  
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth  
adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in  
the Bluetooth device list.  
y
You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you  
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.  
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other  
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be  
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s  
operating instructions.  
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth  
device list and then enter the pass key  
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.  
When the pairing procedure is successful,  
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START  
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.  
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.  
Note  
Pairing by using “SET MENU”  
Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.  
Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See  
page 78 for details.  
The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight  
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully  
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the  
pairing data for the least recently used other component is  
cleared.  
Quick pairing  
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the  
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully  
understand all the instructions before starting.  
Playback of the Bluetooth™  
component  
5
Press V-AUX/DOCK to select “V-AUX” as  
1
2
3
I
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the  
1
the input source.  
F
operation mode selector to SOURCE and  
5
then press V-AUX/DOCK) to select  
“V-AUX” as the input source.  
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want  
to pair with.  
2
Start playback of your Bluetooth component.  
When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the  
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the  
DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.  
8
Press and hold BAND for 3 seconds to  
start pairing.  
Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,  
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the  
Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK  
indicator flashes in the front panel display.  
y
9
• When you press ENTER on the remote control, the  
connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last  
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter  
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in  
the front panel display.  
y
8
To cancel the pairing, press BAND again.  
• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth  
0
component, press RETURN.  
54 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
RECORDING  
Recording  
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating  
instructions for those components.  
Caution  
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being  
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and  
adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your  
DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output  
from the player.  
Notes  
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.  
• TONE CONTROL (see page 51) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 51) and the sound field programs (see page 47)  
do not affect recorded material.  
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.  
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,  
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is  
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.  
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel.  
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing  
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an  
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.  
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.  
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.  
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture  
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.  
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.  
3
4
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
I
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one  
5
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select  
the source component you want to record  
from.  
Start recording on the recording component.  
55 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS  
Advanced sound configurations  
Changing sound field parameter  
settings  
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory  
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial  
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to  
better suit the input source or your listening room.  
3
Press one of the sound field program  
O
selector buttons ( ) repeatedly to select the  
desired sound field program you want to  
adjust.  
9
Press k / n to select the desired sound  
9
field parameter and then l / h to change  
4
the selected sound field parameter value.  
Note  
9
• Press h to increase the value.  
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see  
page 81). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,  
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
9
• Press l to decrease the value.  
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound  
field parameter, see page 58.  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the  
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the  
sound field parameter name in the OSD.  
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field  
program parameter settings.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
R
and then press PARAMETER on the  
remote control.  
The following screen is shown in the OSD.  
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field  
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.  
9
In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.  
9
• If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field  
parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown  
momentarily in the front panel display.  
Sound field program category  
• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,  
MOVIE  
1/2  
9
press n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press  
.
Sci-Fi  
Cursor  
9
h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press  
SUR.;;PLIIx Movie  
DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB  
P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms  
P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0  
S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms  
S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0  
9
9
h to confirm or l to cancel the initialization.  
MOVIE  
2/2  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
Sci-Fi  
SB INIT.DLY;;15ms  
SB ROOM SIZE;;1.0  
DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0  
. INITIALIZE  
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter  
values  
Initialize  
[[]:  
R
Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound  
field parameter screen.  
5
56 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced sound configurations  
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position  
(DIALG.LIFT)  
Basic configuration of sound field  
programs  
Each sound field program has some parameters defining  
the characteristics of the program. To customize the  
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/  
or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.  
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the  
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is  
at the center of the video monitor screen.  
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 56 for details.  
The ideal  
dialogue  
position.  
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound  
field programs (DSP LEVEL)  
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect  
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field  
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to  
adjust the level of the effect sounds.  
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video  
monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.  
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.  
The DSP effect  
sound level is low.  
The DSP effect sound  
level is high.  
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the  
highest position.  
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” in the following cases:  
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL”  
• The effect sound of the selected sound field  
program is too weak.  
You cannot recognize any difference between the  
sound field programs.  
Notes  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”  
is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 68).  
You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial  
dialogue position.  
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL”  
• The sound is vague.  
You feel that the additional sound effect is  
excessive.  
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB  
57 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations  
Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.  
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 56 for details.  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the  
apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the  
first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to  
the reflection face.  
INIT.DLY  
P.INIT.DLY  
S.INIT.DLY  
SB INI.DLY  
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the  
corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the  
CINEMA DSP programs.  
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)  
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Delay  
Delay  
Delay  
Sound source  
Reflection face  
Small value = 1 ms  
Large value = 99 ms  
58 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the  
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the  
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between  
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the  
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter  
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.  
ROOM SIZE  
P.ROOM SIZE  
S.ROOM SIZE  
SB ROOM SIZE  
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the  
corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the  
CINEMA DSP programs.  
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Sound source  
Small value = 0.1  
Large value = 2.0  
Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual  
walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of  
a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one  
which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to  
as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter  
lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.  
LIVENESS  
S.LIVENESS  
SB LIVENESS  
Control range: 0 to 10  
Source sound  
Live  
Dead  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Small reflected  
sound  
Large reflected  
sound  
Small value = 0  
Large value = 10  
59 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation  
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment  
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening  
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.  
REV.TIME  
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s  
Reverberation  
Source sound  
Reverberation  
Early reflections  
60 dB  
60 dB  
60 dB  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
Sound source  
Short  
reverberation  
Long  
reverberation  
Small value = 1.0 s  
Large value = 5.0 s  
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and  
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound  
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.  
REV.DELAY  
Control range: 0 to 250 ms  
Source sound  
(dB)  
60 dB  
Reverberation  
Time  
REV.DELAY  
REV.TIME  
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the  
stronger the reverberation becomes.  
REV.LEVEL  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
Source sound  
(dB)  
REV. LEVEL  
Time  
60 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi  
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.  
DIRECT  
(“2ch Stereo” only)  
Choices: AUTO, OFF  
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only  
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 51).  
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry  
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.  
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2  
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.  
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer  
in the following cases:  
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 68).  
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 69) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”  
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence  
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The  
available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.  
CT LEVEL  
SL LEVEL  
SR LEVEL  
SB LEVEL  
PL LEVEL  
PR LEVEL  
(“7ch Stereo” only)  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of  
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.  
EFFECT LEVEL  
(“Straight Enhancer” and  
“7ch Enhancer” only)  
Choices: HIGH, LOW  
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.  
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.  
Selecting decoders used with sound  
field programs (SUR.)  
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with  
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).  
See page 48 for details about MOVIE sound field  
program.  
Selecting decoders  
Selecting decoders for 2-channel  
sources (surround decode mode)  
Use this feature to play back sources with selected  
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-  
channels.  
Available decoders  
Decoder  
Functions  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro  
Logic II) processing for movie  
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder  
is not available when “SUR.B L/R  
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 69).  
PLIIx Movie  
PLII Movie  
Q
then press SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the  
remote control to select the desired surround  
decoder.  
You can select from the following modes depending on the  
type of source you are playing and your personal  
preference.  
DTS processing for movie sources.  
Neo:6 Cinema  
y
You can change the decoder parameter settings (see page 62). Set  
F
R
the operation mode to AMP and then press PARAMETER  
9
to display the decoder parameters in the OSD. Press k / n  
repeatedly to select the desired decoder parameter and then press  
9
l / h repeatedly to change the value of the selected  
parameter.  
61 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Advanced sound configurations  
Decoder descriptions (SUR.)  
Decoder  
Descriptions  
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.  
Pro Logic  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx  
decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 69).  
PLIIx Movie  
PLII Movie  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx  
decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 69).  
PLIIx Music  
PLII Music  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder  
is not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 69).  
PLIIx Game  
PLII Game  
DTS processing for movie sources.  
DTS processing for music sources.  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND  
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.  
Decoder parameter descriptions  
Decoder parameter  
Features  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as  
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.  
PANORAMA  
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII  
Music” only)  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front  
or towards the rear.  
DIMENSION  
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII  
Music” only)  
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)  
Initial setting: STD (standard)  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely  
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center  
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.  
CENTER WIDTH  
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII  
Music” only)  
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to  
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)  
Initial setting: 3  
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center  
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.  
C. IMAGE  
(“Neo:6 Music” only)  
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to  
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)  
Initial setting: 0.3  
62 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)  
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this  
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening  
environment.  
Auto setup AUTO SETUP  
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 31).  
Manual setup MANUAL SETUP  
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.  
Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU  
Menu  
Parameter  
Functions  
Page  
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP  
speaker terminal.  
68  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
A)SPEAKER SET  
Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the  
low-frequency signals.  
LFE/BASS OUT  
Selects the size of the front speakers.  
FRONT SP  
Selects the size of the center speaker.  
CENTER SP  
Selects the size and number of the surround speakers.  
Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers.  
SUR. L/R SP  
SUR.B L/R SP  
CROSS OVER  
Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or  
“SMALL”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 69).  
Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or  
unclear.  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or  
surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”  
FR.L/FR.R/CNTR/  
SUR.L/SUR.R/  
SBL/SBR/SWFR/  
PR.L/PR.R  
B)SP LEVEL  
Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance.  
71  
71  
UNIT  
C)SP DISTANCE  
Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the  
respective channel.  
FRONT L/FRONT R/  
CENTER/SUR. L/  
SUR. R/SBL/SBR/  
SWFR/PRNS L/  
PRNS R  
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP  
LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.  
71  
D)TEST TONE  
63 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU  
Parameter  
Functions  
Page  
Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the  
volume level or not.  
ADAPTIVE DRC  
Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the  
volume level or not.  
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL  
Adjusts how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 44).  
Sets the maximum volume level of this unit.  
72  
72  
MUTE TYPE  
MAX VOL.  
Sets the volume level of this unit when the power of this unit is turned on.  
INIT. VOL.  
Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU  
Menu  
Parameter  
Functions  
Page  
Selects the type of equalizer.  
EQ TYPE SELECT  
GEQ  
A)EQUALIZER  
Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE  
SELECT” to “GEQ”.  
73  
Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making  
adjustments of “GEQ” or not.  
TEST  
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.  
74  
74  
74  
SPEAKER  
B)LFE LEVEL  
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.  
HEADPHONE  
SPEAKER  
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers.  
C)DYNAMIC  
RANGE  
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the  
headphones.  
HEADPHONE  
Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video  
synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.  
75  
75  
75  
HDMI AUTO  
AUTO  
D)LIPSYNC  
Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio  
and video synchronization function is active.  
Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video  
monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video  
synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.  
MANUAL  
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel  
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES  
decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.  
E)EXTD SUR.  
64 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Input menu 4 INPUT MENU  
Note  
Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input  
sources.  
Parameter  
Functions  
Page  
Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of  
this unit do not correspond to your needs.  
I/O ASSIGNMENT  
Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.  
Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack.  
77  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM  
Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for  
DTS signals.  
DECODER MODE  
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the  
standby mode (see page 28).  
77  
STANDBY CHARGE  
START PAIRING  
BGV  
Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a  
Bluetooth component (see page 54).  
Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks.  
Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder.  
INPUT CH  
FRONT  
Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input  
when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.  
Option menu 5 OPTION MENU  
Menu  
Parameter  
Functions  
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.  
Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD.  
Page  
DIMMER  
A)DISPLAY SET  
79  
OSD SHIFT  
OSD-SOURCE  
Sets the amount of time to display the iPod menu in the video monitor  
after you perform a certain operation.  
Sets the amount of time to display the status information screen after  
you perform a certain operation.  
OSD-AMP  
Selects the mode to display the information of the iPod in the front  
panel display.  
FL SCROLL  
VIDEO CONV.  
HDMI RES.  
Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO,  
S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.  
B)VIDEO SET  
Selects whether this unit activates the HDMI up-conversion of the  
analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-scaled video signals are  
output at the HDMI OUT jack.  
Adjusts the aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI  
OUT jack.  
80  
HDMI ASPECT  
Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values  
and other system settings.  
C)MEMORY GUARD  
65 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Menu  
Parameter  
Functions  
Page  
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input  
sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the  
power of this unit.  
AUDIO SELECT  
D)INIT. CONFIG  
Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected  
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.  
81  
81  
DECODER MODE  
EXTD SUR.  
S.AUDIO  
Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected  
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.  
Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on  
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.  
E)HDMI SET  
Signal information SIGNAL INFO  
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 45).  
66 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Using SET MENU  
Use the remote control to access and adjust each  
parameter.  
9
Press k / n repeatedly and then press  
4
9
ENTER to select and enter the desired  
menu.  
The following displays are examples where “SOUND  
MENU” is selected.  
y
You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is  
reproducing sound.  
3 SOUND MENU  
R
• If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”  
. A)EQUALIZER  
B)LFE LEVEL  
C)DYNAMIC RANGE  
D)LIPSYNC  
operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.  
0
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.  
E)EXTD SUR.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
1
2
Up/Down  
Enter  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:  
H
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET  
MENU”.  
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.  
9
Press k / n repeatedly and then press  
ENTER to select and enter the desired  
5
9
9
Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.  
submenu.  
The following display is an example where “LFE  
LEVEL” is selected.  
SET MENU  
;AUTO SETUP  
;MANUAL SETUP  
;SIGNAL INFO  
.
B)LFE LEVEL  
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB  
HEADPHONE;;-20dB  
Up/Down  
Enter  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:  
Up/Down  
Adjust  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
9
3
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.  
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the  
OSD.  
9
Press k / n to select the desired parameter  
9
and then l / h to change the parameter  
settings.  
6
7
MANUAL SETUP  
. 1 BASIC MENU  
2 VOLUME MENU  
3 SOUND MENU  
4 INPUT MENU  
5 OPTION MENU  
9
• Press h to increase the value.  
9
• Press l to decrease the value.  
Up/Down  
Enter  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:  
H
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET  
MENU”.  
67 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT  
1 BASIC MENU  
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker  
settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set  
automatically when you run the automatic setup.  
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE  
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.  
A)SPEAKER SET  
LFE/BASS OUT  
1 BASIC MENU  
. A)SPEAKER SET  
B)SP LEVEL  
C)SP DISTANCE  
D)TEST TONE  
SWFR FRONT >BOTH  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Enter  
[ENTER]:  
LFE signals output  
Subwoofer(s) and speakers  
Choice  
y
Front  
Other  
Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the  
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.  
Subwoofer(s)  
speakers  
speakers  
Output  
Output  
No output  
No output  
Output  
No output  
No output  
No output  
BOTH  
SWFR  
FRONT  
Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET  
y
9
To select the desired parameter, press k / n repeatedly.  
No output  
Extra speaker assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the  
EXTRA SP terminals.  
Low-frequency signals output  
Subwoofer(s) and speakers  
Choice  
Front  
speakers  
Other  
speakers  
A)SPEAKER SET  
X
X
Subwoofer(s)  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
>FRONT B ZONE B  
PRESENCE NONE  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*1  
*4  
*2  
*3  
*1  
*3  
*3  
*3  
BOTH  
SWFR  
FRONT  
*1  
XXXX[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/DownXXXXX  
XXXX[p]/[[]:EnterXXXXXXX  
X
No output  
Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front  
channels and other speakers set to “SMALL”.  
Always output the low-frequency signals of the front  
channels.  
Choice  
Descriptions  
*2  
*3  
*4  
Select this setting when you use another front  
speaker system in the main room (see page 42).  
FRONT B  
Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set  
to “LARGE”.  
Select this setting when you use another front  
speaker system in another room (see page 42).  
ZONE B  
PRESENCE  
NONE  
Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to  
“SMALL” or “NONE”.  
Select this setting when you use the presence  
speakers (see page 13).  
Select this setting when you do not use the  
EXTRA SP terminals.  
Notes  
• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP  
ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32).  
• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 97), you cannot  
select “PRESENCE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.  
• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out  
“AUTO SETUP” again (see page 31).  
68 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP  
Measure for the speaker size  
The woofer section of a speaker is  
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large  
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small  
A)SPEAKER SET  
SUR. L/R SP  
Front speakers FRONT SP  
NONE >SMALL LARGE  
A)SPEAKER SET  
FRONT SP  
Choice  
LARGE  
Descriptions  
Select this setting when the surround speakers  
are large.  
SMALL >LARGE  
Select this setting when the surround speakers  
are small.  
SMALL  
Choice  
LARGE  
Descriptions  
Select this setting when you do not use the  
surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual  
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 50), and “SUR.B  
L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.  
NONE  
Select this setting when the front speakers are  
large.  
Select this setting when the front speakers are  
small.  
SMALL  
Surround back left/right speakers  
SUR.B L/R SP  
Note  
A)SPEAKER SET  
SUR.B L/R SP  
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select only  
“LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to  
other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to  
“LARGE” automatically.  
SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1  
Center speaker CENTER SP  
Choice  
LRGx1  
Descriptions  
A)SPEAKER SET  
CENTER SP  
Select this setting when the single surround back  
speaker is large.  
Select this setting when the surround back left  
and right speakers are Large.  
LRGx2  
SMLx1  
SMLx2  
NONE  
NONE >SMALL LARGE  
Select this setting when the single surround back  
speaker is small.  
When the center speaker is large:  
Select “LARGE” (large).  
Select this setting when the surround back left  
and right speakers are small.  
When the center speaker is small:  
Select “SMALL” (small).  
Select this setting when you do not use the  
surround back speakers. The surround back  
channel signals are directed to the surround left  
and right speakers.  
When you do not use the center speaker:  
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are  
directed to the front left and right speakers.  
Note  
Choice  
LARGE  
Descriptions  
If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R  
SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back channels  
are not directed to the surround left and right speakers.  
Select this setting when the center speaker is  
large.  
Select this setting when the center speaker is  
small.  
SMALL  
Select this setting when you do not use the center  
speaker. The center channel signals are directed  
to the front left and right speakers.  
NONE  
69 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Bass cross over CROSS OVER  
Speaker level B)SP LEVEL  
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels  
between the front left or surround left speakers and each  
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 68).  
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the  
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER  
SET” (see page 68). All frequencies below the selected  
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer(s) or front  
speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT”  
in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 68).  
Initial setting:  
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,  
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz  
FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB  
CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR: –1.0 dB  
A)SPEAKER SET  
CROSS OVER  
B)SP LEVEL  
1/2  
B)SP LEVEL  
2/2  
. FR.L  
FR.R  
CNTR  
SUR.L  
SUR.R  
. SBL  
SBR  
SWFR  
FREQ;;;;80Hz  
y
SP LEVEL  
FR.L  
FR.R  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover  
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and  
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE  
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if  
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.  
CNTR  
SUR.L  
SUR.R  
SBL  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Subwoofer  
A)SPEAKER SET  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
SBR  
SWFR  
PR.L  
>NORMAL REVERSE  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
PR.R  
Choice  
Functions  
y
Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.  
NORMAL  
(normal)  
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the  
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or  
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.  
• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the  
“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 71).  
Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.  
REVERSE  
(reverse)  
Notes  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting  
of the speakers.  
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R  
SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 69).  
70 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.  
Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE  
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each  
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.  
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the  
main listening position. However, this is not possible in  
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay  
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all  
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same  
time.  
D)TEST TONE  
>OFF ON  
Select  
Return  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:  
Choice  
OFF  
Functions  
C)SP DISTANCE  
1/2  
C)SP DISTANCE  
2/2  
This unit does not output the test tone for the  
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP  
DISTANCE” settings.  
. UNIT;;;;;;meters  
FRONT L;;;;3.00m  
FRONT R;;;;3.00m  
CENTER;;;;;2.60m  
SUR. L;;;;;2.40m  
SUR. R;;;;;2.40m  
. SBL;;;;;;;;2.40m  
SBR;;;;;;;;2.40m  
SWFR;;;;;;;3.00m  
PRNS L;;;;;3.00m  
PRNS R;;;;;3.00m  
This unit outputs the test tone for the  
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP  
DISTANCE” settings.  
ON  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Adjust  
[p]/[[]:  
y
Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT  
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s  
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening  
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,  
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.  
Choice  
meters (m)  
feet (ft)  
Functions  
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.  
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.  
Note  
This function is automatically turned off if you exit from “BASIC  
MENU”.  
Speaker distances  
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)  
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)  
Initial setting:  
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/  
PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)  
SUR. L/SUR. R/SBL/SBR: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)  
SP DISTANCE  
FRONT L  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
FRONT R  
CENTER  
SUR. L  
SUR. R  
SBL  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Subwoofer  
SBR  
SWFR  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
PRNS L  
PRNS R  
Notes  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting  
of the speakers.  
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B  
L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 69).  
Test tone D)TEST TONE  
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER  
71 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL  
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP  
effect level (see page 57) automatically in conjunction  
with the volume level.  
2 VOLUME MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume  
settings.  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
2 VOLUME MENU  
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with  
the volume level.  
. ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF  
ADAPTIVE DSP  
LEVEL;;;;OFF  
Does not adjust the DSP effect level  
automatically.  
MUTE TYPE;;;;;;FULL  
MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB  
INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF  
OFF  
Up/Down  
Select  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
Note  
Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit  
does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP  
LEVEL” (see page 57).  
Adaptive dynamic range control  
ADAPTIVE DRC  
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in  
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful  
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When  
“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls  
the dynamic range as follows:  
Muting type MUTE TYPE  
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function  
reduces the output volume (see page 44).  
– If the VOLUME setting is low:  
the dynamic range is narrow  
– If the VOLUME setting is high:  
Choice  
FULL  
–20dB  
Functions  
Mutes all the audio output.  
the dynamic range is wide  
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.  
Maximum volume MAX VOL.  
AUTO  
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This  
feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by  
mistake. For example, the original volume range is –80.0  
dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –  
5.0 dB, the volume range becomes  
AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
Input level  
Input level  
–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.  
VOLUME: low  
VOLUME: high  
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB  
Control step: 5.0 dB  
Choice  
AUTO  
OFF  
Functions  
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.  
Notes  
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.  
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level  
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX  
VOL.” setting.  
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume  
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and  
“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is  
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of  
this unit next time.  
y
You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal  
sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”  
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.  
Note  
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function  
when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 51).  
Initial volume INIT. VOL.  
Use this feature to set the volume level of this unit when  
the power of this unit is turned on.  
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Note  
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume  
setting.  
72 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Graphic equalizer GEQ  
3 SOUND MENU  
Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.  
Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,  
surround L/R and surround back L/R, and surround back  
speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. You can  
adjust 7 frequency bands (63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz,  
2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 16 kHz).  
3 SOUND MENU  
. A)EQUALIZER  
B)LFE LEVEL  
C)DYNAMIC RANGE  
D)LIPSYNC  
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
E)EXTD SUR.  
Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:Enter  
A)EQUALIZER  
2/2  
A)EQUALIZER  
1/2  
TEST >OFF ON  
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L  
TEST >OFF ON  
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L  
.
.
2.5kHz  
6.3kHz  
16kHz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
63Hz  
160Hz  
400Hz  
1kHz  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
Equalizer A)EQUALIZER  
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the  
graphic equalizer.  
Up/Down  
Adjust  
Up/Down  
Select  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT  
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.  
y
9
9
Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust  
the selected frequency band.  
A)EQUALIZER  
Note  
EQ TYPE SELECT  
AUTO PEQ >GEQ OFF  
[NATURAL]  
The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is  
selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Test tone TEST  
Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while  
Choice  
Functions  
9
listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press k / n  
repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.  
Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in  
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 32).  
AUTO PEQ  
A)EQUALIZER  
1/2  
Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic  
equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers  
GEQ  
. TEST >OFF ON  
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L  
9
matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic  
63Hz  
160Hz  
400Hz  
1kHz  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
0dB  
equalizer screen.  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
Deactivates the equalizing feature.  
OFF  
Up/Down  
Select  
y
Currently applied parametric equalizer type (see page 32) appears  
under “AUTO PEQ”.  
Choice  
OFF  
Functions  
Does not output test tones and output the  
currently selected source component.  
Note  
Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.  
You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO  
SETUP” in advance (see page 31). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is  
automatically selected as the default setting.  
ON  
73 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Low-frequency effect level  
B)LFE LEVEL  
Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE  
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range  
compression to be applied to your speakers or  
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is  
decoding bitstream signals.  
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-  
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of  
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries  
low-frequency special effects which are only added to  
certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input  
signal contains the LFE channel.  
C)DYNAMIC RANGE  
SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX  
. HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX  
Control range: –20 to 0 dB  
Control step: 1 dB  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
B)LFE LEVEL  
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB  
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB  
Speakers SPEAKER  
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Adjust  
[p]/[[]:  
Headphones HEADPHONE  
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the  
headphones.  
Speakers SPEAKER  
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.  
Choice  
Functions  
Headphones HEADPHONE  
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.  
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow  
when this unit is decoding bitstream signals  
(except Dolby TrueHD).  
MIN/AUTO  
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according  
to the instruction of the input source signals  
when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD  
signals.  
Note  
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 68),  
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
jack.  
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When  
this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the  
dynamic range control is always active  
regardless of the instruction of the input source  
signals.  
STD  
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.  
MAX  
74 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Audio and video synchronization  
(lip sync) D)LIPSYNC  
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video  
synchronization.  
Extended surround E)EXTD SUR.  
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for  
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the  
connected surround back speakers.  
D)LIPSYNC  
E)EXTD SUR.  
. HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF  
AUTO;;;;;;;;;---ms  
(offset;;;---ms)  
EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO  
MANUAL;;;;;;;;;0ms  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
Select  
Return  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:  
HDMI automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO  
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI  
OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic  
audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip  
sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Activates the optimum decoder to play back  
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit  
recognizes a signal flag being input.  
synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate  
or deactivate the automatic lip sync.  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1  
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.  
PLIIxMovie  
PLIIxMusic  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/  
7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music  
decoder.  
If the connected video monitor is compatible  
with the automatic lip sync:  
Select “ON”. Use “AUTO” to make fine adjustments of  
the audio and video synchronization.  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/  
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-  
ES decoder.  
EX/ES  
OFF  
If the video monitor is not compatible with the  
automatic lip sync or you do not want to use  
the automatic lip sync:  
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1  
channels.  
Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL” to adjust the audio and  
video synchronization.  
Auto delay AUTO  
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and  
video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to  
“ON”.  
Control range: 0 to 240 ms  
Control step: 1 ms  
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio  
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio  
delay that you set in “AUTO”. This unit stores the value of  
“offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync  
compatible video monitors.  
Manual delay MANUAL  
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output  
manually to synchronize audio with video images when  
you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.  
Control range: 0 to 240 ms  
Control step: 1 ms  
75 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Input/output assignment  
I/O ASSIGNMENT  
4 INPUT MENU  
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according  
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this  
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the  
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively  
connect more components.  
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input  
source.  
4 INPUT MENU  
1/2  
4 INPUT MENU  
2/2  
. A) PHONO  
. H) DOCK  
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select  
B)  
C)  
D) MD/CD-R  
E) DVD  
F) DTV/CBL  
G) V-AUX  
Up/Down  
TUNER  
I) BLUETOOTH  
CD  
J)  
K)  
L) MULTI CH  
DVR  
I
the corresponding component by using the INPUT  
VCR  
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons  
5
(
) on the remote control).  
Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
Enter  
[ENTER]:  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
Enter  
[ENTER]:  
J)DVR  
Input source  
A)PHONO  
B)TUNER  
C)CD  
D)MD/CD-R  
E)DVD  
Parameter  
I/O ASSIGNMENT  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM  
*
. COMPONENT IN;;;[B]  
COAXIAL IN;;;;NONE  
OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE  
OPTICAL OUT;;;NONE  
HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[3]  
Current( DTV/CBL )  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:Enter  
DECODER MODE  
F)DTV/CBL  
G)V-AUX  
J)DVR  
y
• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not  
assigned to the input/output jack.  
• Set “OPTICAL OUT” to “(1)” for the digital recording  
component that you connect to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.  
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same  
type of jack.  
K)VCR  
H)DOCK  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM  
STANDBY CHARGE  
• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack  
names that have been changed from their previous settings.  
• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/  
output jack appears in the OSD (“Current( DTV/CBL )” in the  
display example above).  
I)BLUETOOTH  
L)MULTI CH  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM  
START PAIRING  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM  
BGV  
INPUT CH  
FRONT  
Note  
Some parameters described above may not be available for all  
input sources and some parameters are only available for specific  
input sources.  
76 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Input rename INPUT RENAME  
Decoder mode DECODER MODE  
Use this feature to change the name of the input source  
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.  
Use this feature to switch the decoder activation mode.  
When you select “DTS” and digital audio signals are  
input, this unit always activates the DTS decoder and only  
plays back the DTS digital audio signals.  
J)DVR  
INPUT RENAME  
C)CD  
DVR .  
DVR  
I/O ASSIGNMENT  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB  
. DECODER MODE;;;AUTO  
Position  
Character  
[p]/[[]:  
[ ]/[ ]:  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Return  
[RETURN]:  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Select  
[p]/[[]:  
9
1
2
Press l / h to place the “_” (underscore)  
under the space or the character you want to  
edit.  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Automatically detects digital audio signal input  
types and selects the appropriate decoder.  
9
Press k / n to select the character you  
9
want to use and then press l / h to move  
Activates the DTS decoder and plays back only  
DTS digital audio signals when digital audio  
signals are input.  
DTS  
to the next space.  
Notes  
Note  
You can use up to 9 characters for each input.  
“DECODER MODE” is only available when the digital audio  
input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL, and/or COAXIAL) are assigned  
to the selected input source.  
9
• Press n to change the character in the following order,  
9
or press k to go in the reverse order:  
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.  
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE  
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the  
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the  
standby mode.  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each  
input source.  
9
Press ENTER to complete.  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when  
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.  
Volume trim VOL. TRIM  
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at  
each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the  
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in  
volume when switching between input sources.  
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB  
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only  
when this unit is turned on.  
OFF  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Initial setting: 0.0 dB  
B)TUNER  
INPUT RENAME  
. VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB  
Up/Down  
Adjust  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE  
OUT jacks.  
77 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Start pairing START PAIRING  
Choice  
LAST  
Functions  
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha  
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with  
your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,  
Automatically selects the last selected video  
source as the background video source.  
Selects the corresponding input source as the  
background video source.  
DVD, DTV/  
CBL, DVR,  
VCR, V-AUX  
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for  
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read  
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.  
Does not play the video source in the  
background.  
OFF  
Input channels INPUT CH  
Use this setting to select the number of channels input  
from an external decoder (see page 25).  
Choices: 6CH, 8CH  
9
1
2
Press ENTER to start pairing.  
The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching  
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the  
video monitor.  
L)MULTI CH  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB  
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST  
. INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH  
Check that the Bluetooth component detects  
the Bluetooth adapter.  
If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,  
“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the  
Bluetooth device list.  
Up/Down  
Select  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:  
If the connected component outputs discrete  
6-channel audio signals.  
Select “6CH”.  
3
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth  
device list and then enter the pass key  
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.  
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,  
“Pairing completed” appears.  
If the connected component outputs discrete  
8-channel audio signals.  
Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the  
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right  
channel signals output from the connected component  
are input.  
y
0
To cancel the pairing, press RETURN to exit from  
“START PAIRING”.  
0
Press RETURN to exit from “START  
4
Front left and right channels input jack FRONT  
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the  
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel  
signals output from the connected external decoder is  
input.  
PAIRING”.  
Notes  
• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth  
components, “Not found” appears.  
• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No  
Bluetooth Adapter” appears.  
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR,  
V-AUX  
L) MULTI CH  
Multi-channel input BGV BGV  
Use this feature to select the video source played in the  
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks.  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB  
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST  
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH  
.
FRONT;;;;;;;;;;;DVD  
Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:Select  
L)MULTI CH  
INPUT RENAME  
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB  
. BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST  
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH  
Note  
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to  
“8CH”.  
Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[ENTER]:Select  
78 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP  
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the  
status information screen after you perform a certain  
operation.  
5 OPTION MENU  
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.  
Choice  
Functions  
5 OPTION MENU  
. A)DISPLAY SET  
B)VIDEO SET  
C)MEMORY GUARD  
D)INIT. CONFIG  
E)HDMI SET  
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an  
operation.  
ON  
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform  
a certain operation.  
10S  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Enter  
[ENTER]:  
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform  
a certain operation.  
30S  
Display settings A)DISPLAY SET  
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL  
Use this feature to set the mode to display the iPod menu  
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel  
display.  
Note  
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set “OSD  
SHIFT” to the factory presets (see page 97).  
Choice  
CONT  
Functions  
Continuous mode.  
Select this to display the operation status in the  
front panel display in a continuous manner.  
A)DISPLAY SET  
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0  
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5  
OSD-SOURCE;;;;;;30S  
OSD-AMP;;;;;;;;;30S  
FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT  
Scroll-once mode.  
ONCE  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down  
Adjust  
[p]/[[]:  
Select this to display the operation status in the  
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric  
characters after scrolling all characters once.  
Dimmer DIMMER  
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel  
Video settings B)VIDEO SET  
display.  
Control range: – 4 to 0  
Control step: 1  
Note  
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the  
parameters in “VIDEO SET” to the factory presets (see page 97).  
9
Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.  
Press h to make the front panel display brighter.  
9
B)VIDEO SET  
. VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON  
HDMI RES.;;;;*THRGH  
OSD shift OSD SHIFT  
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.  
Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)  
Control step: 1  
Up/Down  
Select  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:  
[p]/[[]:  
Initial setting: 0  
9
Press l to lower the position of the OSD.  
9
Press h to raise the position of the OSD.  
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.  
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals  
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT  
VIDEO jacks.  
Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE  
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the  
iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain  
operation.  
Choice  
ON  
Functions  
Choice  
Functions  
Converts composite, S-video, and component  
video signals interchangeably and up-converts  
composite, S-video, and component video  
signals to HDMI video signals.  
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an  
operation.  
ON  
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform  
a certain operation.  
10S  
Does not convert any signals.  
OFF  
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform  
a certain operation.  
30S  
79 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT  
Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for  
analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.  
Notes  
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line  
video signals interchangeably.  
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i  
(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite  
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.  
B)VIDEO SET  
VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON  
HDMI RES.;;;;*1080p  
. HDMI ASPECT;;;THRGH  
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR  
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the  
same type of video connections between each component.  
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are  
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may  
suffer depending on your VCR.  
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video  
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such  
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.  
[p]/[[]:Up/Down  
Select  
[ENTER]:  
Choice  
THRGH  
Functions  
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect  
ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.  
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of  
4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio  
of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left  
sides as a result.  
16:9  
HDMI resolution HDMI RES.  
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-  
scaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S  
VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-  
scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.  
This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:  
Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to  
your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.  
SMART  
Notes  
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p,  
or 1080p  
• When “HDMI RES.” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot make  
any adjustments to “HDMI ASPECT”.  
480p/576p 1080i, 720p, or 1080p  
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this  
unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”.  
• When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images  
of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.  
• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the  
signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the  
setting of “HDMI ASPECT” does not affect the video signals  
output at the HDMI OUT jack.  
B)VIDEO SET  
HDMI RESOLUTION  
>*THROUGH * 576p  
* 720p  
*1080p  
*1080i  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:  
Select  
Enter  
Choice  
Functions  
Does not up-scale any analog video signals.  
THROUGH  
Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,  
1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.  
576p (or 480p),  
1080i, 720p,  
1080p  
Notes  
• This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals  
with 720p or 1080i of resolution.  
• The “HDMI RES.” parameter appears only when you set  
“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.  
• If you connect your video monitor via HDMI connection, this  
unit automatically detects the available video signal resolution  
of the video monitor, and an asterisk (*) appears on the left of  
the available video signal resolution(s).  
• If this unit cannot detect the available video signal resolution(s)  
of the connected video monitor, set “MON. CHK” (see page 97)  
to “SKIP” and then set “HDMI RES.” again.  
• This unit does not convert between 480 line video signals and  
576 line video signals.  
80 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Audio select AUDIO SELECT  
Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD  
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound  
field program parameter and other system settings.  
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack  
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power  
of this unit.  
C)MEMORY GUARD  
>OFF  
ON  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Automatically detects the type of input signals  
and selects the appropriate audio input jack  
select setting.  
[p]/[[]:Select  
Return  
[ENTER]:  
Automatically selects the last input jack select  
setting used for the connected input source.  
LAST  
Choice  
OFF  
Functions  
Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.  
Decoder mode DECODER MODE  
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode  
(see page 77) for the input sources connected to the  
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of  
this unit.  
Protects:  
ON  
– sound field program parameters  
– “AUTO SETUP” items  
– all speaker levels  
– “MANUAL SETUP” items  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Notes  
Automatically detects the type of input signals  
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.  
You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY  
GUARD” is set to “ON”:  
Automatically selects the last decoder mode  
setting used for the connected input source.  
LAST  
– “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 75)  
– “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 77)  
– “MEMORY GUARD”  
Extended surround EXTD SUR.  
Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode  
(see page 75) for the input sources connected to the  
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of  
this unit.  
• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, G ” appears at the  
top right of the “SET MENU” screen.  
You can change the settings of “SUR.” in the sound field  
program parameter screen (see page 61) even if “MEMORY  
GUARD” is set to “ON”.  
Choice  
AUTO  
Functions  
Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG  
Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input  
jack select, active decoders and extended surround when  
you turn on this unit.  
Automatically detects the digital audio input  
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.  
LAST  
Automatically selects the last decoder mode set  
for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.  
D)INIT. CONFIG  
. AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO  
DECODER MODE;;AUTO  
EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO  
Select  
Return  
[p]/[[]:  
[ENTER]:  
81 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
HDMI set E)HDMI SET  
Use this feature to select the component to play back  
HDMI audio signals.  
E)HDMI SET  
S. AUDIO;DSP-AX863SE  
[p]/[[]:Select  
Return  
[ENTER]:  
Support audio S.AUDIO  
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI  
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component  
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this  
unit.  
Choice  
Functions  
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The  
HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input  
jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI  
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on  
the rear panel of this unit.  
DSP-AX863SE  
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another  
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
OTHER  
Notes  
• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI  
input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned  
on even if “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.  
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the  
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of  
each connected component.  
82 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
Remote control features  
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha  
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code  
for each input source (see page 85).  
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components  
Controlling this unit  
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this  
Controlling a TV  
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your  
F
F
unit.  
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate  
5DTV/CBL 5PHONO  
or  
remote control code for  
page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both  
5DTV/CBL  
set for  
5PHONO  
, priority is given to the one  
.
and  
5DTV/CBL  
*2  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
*1  
*1  
SCENE  
SCENE  
*1  
*3  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TUNER  
TUNER  
A
B
C
A
B
C
-
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
SELECT  
SELECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
+
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
+
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
VOLUME  
VOLUME  
Set to AMP  
Set to TV  
TV  
TV  
*1  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
SRCH MODE  
SRCH MODE  
PURE DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
*1  
STRAIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MEMORY  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
MEMORY  
*2  
CLASSICAL  
1
LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
*2  
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
8
5
6
7
6
7
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
9
0
+10  
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
REC  
REC  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
Notes  
Notes  
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the  
operation mode selector position.  
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the  
operation mode selector position.  
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component  
Remote control  
TV POWER  
Digital TV/Cable TV  
F
operation mode selector is set to AMP.  
Turns on or off the power.  
*3  
5
A, B, or C, is the optional component control area button.  
You can control the desired component without changing the  
input source of this unit.  
TV VOL +/–  
Increases or decreases the volume  
level.  
TV CH +/–  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
Changes the channel number.  
Mutes the audio output.  
Changes the input source.  
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode  
F
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on  
page 84.  
83 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Remote control features  
Controlling other components  
F
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
[6]  
[7]  
AUDIO  
other components selected with the input selector buttons  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
SRCH MODE  
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
5
(
). You must set the appropriate remote control code for  
SCENE  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT  
TUNER  
A
B
C
each input source in advance (see page 85). The following  
table shows the function of each control button used to  
control other components assigned to each input selector  
RETURN  
MEMORY  
[8]  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
[4]  
[5]  
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
8
5
6
7
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
5
button ( ). Be advised that some buttons may not  
[9]  
SELECT  
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
correctly operate the selected component.  
[10]  
AMP  
SOURCE  
REC  
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
+
VOLUME  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
y
TV  
The remote control has 12 modes (control areas) to control  
components so that the remote control can operate up to 12  
different components.  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
DVD player/  
DVD recorder  
Cable TV/  
Satellite tuner  
MD recorder/  
CD recorder  
VCR  
TV  
LD player  
CD player  
Tape deck  
Tuner  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
[1] AV POWER  
[2] TITLE  
Power  
Power  
Title  
Power  
VCR power  
Title  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Band  
Title  
Title  
[3] ENTER  
Menu enter  
Menu select  
Menu select  
Preset up  
(1 to 8)  
PRESET/CH k Menu up  
Menu up  
Menu up  
Preset down  
(1 to 8)  
PRESET/CH n Menu down  
Menu down  
Menu left  
Menu down  
Menu left  
Preset down  
(A to E)  
A/B/C/D/E l  
A/B/C/D/E h  
Menu left  
Preset up  
(A to E)  
Menu right  
Return  
Menu right  
Return  
Menu right  
Return  
Direction A/B  
[4] RETURN  
[5] 1-9, 0, +10  
Return  
Memory  
Preset stations (1 to  
8) / Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons  
[6] MENU  
[7] AUDIO  
[8] DISPLAY  
[9] ENT  
Menu  
Menu  
Menu  
Search mode  
Audio  
Display  
Audio  
Display  
Display  
Enter  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Enter  
Enter/recall  
Enter  
[10] ll  
DVR search  
backward  
DVR search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Information  
*2  
*2  
DVR search  
forward  
DVR search  
forward  
hh  
b
a
REC  
Search forward Search forward  
Skip backward  
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON  
*2  
*2  
DVR skip  
backward  
DVR skip  
backward  
Chapter/Skip  
backward  
Program type  
seek mode  
Skip backward Skip backward Direction back  
Direction  
*2  
*2  
DVR skip  
DVR skip  
Chapter/Skip  
forward  
Program type  
seek mode  
Skip forward  
Skip forward  
Skip forward  
*2  
*2  
forward  
forward  
forward  
Disc skip (player)  
Rec  
*2  
*2  
Disc skip  
Rec  
Rec  
DVR rec  
DVR rec  
Rec (recorder)  
*2  
*2  
s
e
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
Stop  
Pause  
Play  
DVR stop  
DVR stop  
*2  
*2  
DVR pause  
DVR pause  
*2  
*2  
DVR play  
p
DVR play  
Notes  
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.  
*2 These buttons operate your VCR or DVR when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85).  
84 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote control features  
Selecting a component to be controlled  
You can select a component to be controlled  
independently of the input source selected with the input  
selector buttons.  
Setting remote control codes  
You can control other components by setting the  
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for  
each control area. For a complete list of available remote  
control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at  
the end of this manual.  
6
Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the  
desired component.  
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the  
The following table shows the default component  
(Library: component category) and the remote control  
code for each control area.  
6
display window ( ) on the remote control.  
SELECT  
Remote control code default settings  
Component  
category  
Default  
code  
Control area  
Manufacturer  
Controlling optional components  
(Option mode)  
TUNER  
TUNER  
TAPE  
LD  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
2602  
2700  
2200  
2607  
A
B
C
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be  
programmed with remote control functions independently  
from any input source. This area is useful for  
programming commands that are to be used only as a part  
of a macro function or for components that do not have a  
valid remote control code.  
TUNER  
V-AUX/  
DOCK  
TUNER  
Yamaha  
2606  
DTV/CBL  
CD  
TV  
CD  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
Yamaha  
2300  
2400  
2100  
2807  
6
To select the option mode, press SELECT k  
repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display  
/
n
MD/CD-R  
DVD  
CD-R  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
TV  
6
window ( ) on the remote control.  
DVR  
SELECT  
VCR  
PHONO  
Note  
Note  
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a  
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.  
In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.  
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See  
page 87 to program buttons operated within this component  
control area.  
1
Set the operation mode selector to  
F
SOURCE and then press an input selector  
5
button ( ) to select the control area you  
want to set up.  
TUNER  
A
B
C
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
85 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote control features  
C
A
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
four-digit remote control code for the  
component you want to use.  
2
Press and hold LEARN for about 3  
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar  
object.  
4
The library name (e.g. L;DVD) and the name of the  
selected control area (e.g. DVD) appear alternately in  
For a complete list of available remote control codes,  
refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of  
this manual.  
6
the display window ( ) on the remote control.  
LIVE/CLUB  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER UR. DECODE PARAMETER  
LEARN  
8
5
6
7
MULTI CH IN  
9
0
y
You can set a remote control code of a different type of  
9
Press ENTER to set the number.  
5
9
component to an control area. Press l / h repeatedly  
6
“OK” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
to change the library (component category).  
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,  
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),  
remote control if setting was successful.  
6
“NG” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),  
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR  
• If you want to setup for another control area, press the  
remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this  
case, start over from step 3.  
y
6
input selector button, or press SELECT k / n  
If you continuously want to set up another code for another  
repeatedly to select the control area.  
5
component, press the input selector button ( ), or  
Notes  
6
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then  
repeat steps 2 through 5.  
C
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3  
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.  
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within  
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically  
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.  
C
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup  
6
7
mode.  
LEARN  
9
Press ENTER.  
The four-digit code set for the selected component  
3
B
3
Press p or AV POWER to confirm  
whether you can control your component  
using the remote control.  
6
appears in the display window ( ).  
Note  
6
“0000” appears in the display window ( ) if no code has  
POWER  
been set.  
or  
AV  
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your  
component has more than one code, try each of them until  
you find the correct one.  
Notes  
6
• “ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,  
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.  
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes  
for commercially available audio and video components  
(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible  
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote  
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming  
remote control supplied with the component.  
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over  
remote control code functions.  
86 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control features  
Programming codes from other  
remote controls  
You can program remote control codes from other remote  
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program  
functions not included in the basic operations covered by  
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control  
code is not available. You can program the function of  
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas  
in the following illustration. The buttons can be  
2
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm  
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control  
on a flat surface so that their infrared  
transmitters are aimed at each other.  
programmed independently for each control area.  
Other remote control  
5 to 10 cm  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
AUDIO  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
SRCH MODE  
PURE DIRECT  
SCENE  
ENTER  
1
2
3
4
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
STRAIGHT  
TUNER  
A
B
C
RETURN  
MEMORY  
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
C
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or  
1
2
3
4
3
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
similar object.  
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
“LEARN” and the name of the selected control area  
(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display  
SELECT  
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
AMP  
SOURCE  
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
+
REC  
6
window ( ) on the remote control.  
VOLUME  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
TV  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
LEARN  
Note  
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote  
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most  
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some  
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the  
operating instructions for the other remote control.  
Notes  
C
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for  
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control  
code setting mode.  
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within  
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically  
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.  
1
Set the operation mode selector to  
F
SOURCE and then press an input selector  
5
button ( ) to select a an control area.  
4
Press the button for which you want to  
program the new function.  
Note  
6
“LEARN” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
remote control.  
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to  
F
SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to  
AMP and program a remote control codes from other  
F
remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the  
amplifier function of this unit.  
87 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Remote control features  
Changing source names in the  
display window  
5
Press and hold the button you want to  
program on the other remote control until  
6
“OK” appears in the display window ( ) on  
You can change the name of the input source that appears  
the remote control.  
6
in the display window ( ) on the remote control if you  
6
“NG” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
want to use a different name than the factory preset. This  
feature is useful when you have set an control area to  
control a different component.  
remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this  
case, start over from step 4.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
1
F
SOURCE and then press an input selector  
5
button ( ) to select the control area you  
want to rename.  
The name of the selected control area appears in the  
Other remote control  
6
display window ( ).  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4  
and 5.  
• If you continuously want to program another function for  
or  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
6
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the  
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.  
C
Press LEARN again to exit the learning  
mode.  
6
LEARN  
C
Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or  
similar object.  
2
Notes  
6
• “ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,  
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.  
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.  
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may  
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this  
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room  
for further learning.  
RENAME  
Note  
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30  
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.  
In this case, start over from step 2.  
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:  
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other  
components are weak.  
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too  
great or too small.  
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each  
other at the appropriate angle.  
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.  
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or  
uncommon.  
88 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote control features  
Macro programming features  
9
Press k / n to select and enter a character.  
9
Pressing n changes the character as follows:  
3
The macro programming feature makes it possible to  
perform a series of operations with the press of a single  
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,  
normally you would turn on the components, select the  
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The  
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these  
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The  
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with  
macro programs. You can also program your own macros  
(see page 91).  
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),  
/ (slash), and space.  
9
Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
A/B/C/D/E  
MACRO operations  
Macro buttons  
9
Press h to move the cursor to the next  
position.  
4
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
REC  
PRESET/CH  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
RENAME  
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
ENTER  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
A/B/CE  
MACRO ON/OFF  
MACRO  
y
9
Press l to move the cursor to the previous position.  
C
Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.  
1
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
9
Press ENTER to set the new name.  
6
“OK” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
5
remote control if renaming was successful.  
6
“NG” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this  
case, start over from step 3.  
2
3
Press the desired macro button.  
y
If you continuously want to rename another control area,  
5
C
Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF  
when you finish to using the macro  
programming operation.  
press the input selector button ( ), or press  
6
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then  
repeat steps 3 through 5.  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
C
Press RENAME again to exit the renaming  
mode.  
6
RENAME  
Notes  
Note  
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does  
not accept any other operation until it has completed running  
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).  
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro  
is operating until the macro operation is complete.  
6
“ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,  
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.  
89 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote control features  
Default macro functions  
Pressing  
To automatically transmit these signals in order  
macro button  
First  
Second  
Third  
STANDBY  
POWER  
TUNER  
A
STANDBY  
POWER  
POWER  
(*1)  
(*2)  
TV  
TUNER  
A
B
B
C
C
-
-
V AUX/DOCK  
V AUX/DOCK  
DTV/CBL  
CD  
DTV/CBL  
CD  
POWER  
(*1)  
(CD area) (*3)  
(MD/CD-R area) (*3)  
MD/CD-R  
DVD  
MD/CD-R  
DVD  
(DVD area) (*3)  
(DVR area) (*3)  
DVR  
VCR  
DVR  
VCR  
(VCR area) (*3)  
PHONO  
PHONO  
*1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS  
on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.  
*2  
5DTV/CBL 5PHONO  
or  
your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for  
When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either  
(see page 85), you can turn on the power of  
5DTV/CBL 5PHONO  
.
takes priority over the one for  
*3 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When  
using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see  
page 87) or set a remote control code (see page 85).  
90 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control features  
Programming macro operations  
You can program your own macro and use the macro  
programming feature to transmit several remote control  
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to  
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations  
before programming the macro.  
Note  
6
“AGAIN” appears in the display window ( ) if you press a  
button other than a macro button.  
3
Press the buttons for the functions you want  
to include in the macro operation in  
sequence.  
Notes  
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you  
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote  
control automatically exits the macro mode. The  
following example is for programming the following  
procedure:  
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is  
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again  
when the programmed macro is cleared.  
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default  
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.  
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations  
such as volume control in a macro.  
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press POWER.  
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press DVD.  
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press AUDIO.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
SOURCE and then press MACRO using  
a ballpoint pen or similar object.  
1
F
C
MCR 1: POWER  
6
“MCR ?” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
remote control.  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
PRESET/CH  
SCENE  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
1
AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
SRCH MODE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TUNER  
A
B
C
3
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
STRAIGHT  
RETURN  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
MEMORY  
MCR 3: AUDIO  
2
MACRO  
or  
MCR 2: DVD  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
Indicates the  
number of macro  
steps entered  
Note  
Flashes alternately so you can  
set the next step  
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30  
seconds, the macro programming mode will be  
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.  
2
Press the macro button you want to use to  
operate the macro.  
The macro button name (e.g. “M;DVD”) and the  
selected component name (e.g. “DVD”) appear  
Note  
6
To change the selected control area, press SELECT k / n.  
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,  
whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected control  
area.  
6
6
alternately in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control.  
C
Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen  
or similar object when the operation  
4
STANDBY  
POWER  
sequence you want to program is complete.  
TUNER  
A
B
C
Note  
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
6
“ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) if you press  
more than one button simultaneously.  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
91 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote control features  
Clearing configurations  
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such  
as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names  
and setup remote control ID.  
C
Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3  
3
seconds.  
6
WAIT” appears in the display window ( ). If  
clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the  
6
display window ( ) on the remote control.  
Clearing function sets  
CLEAR  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
SOURCE and then press CLEAR by  
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.  
1
F
C
6
“CLEAR” appears in the display window ( ).  
y
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button  
reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you  
have set remote control codes).  
CLEAR  
Notes  
or  
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to  
complete.  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
6
• “C;NG” appears in the display window ( ) if clearing was  
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.  
6
• “ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) if you press a  
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more  
than one button simultaneously.  
Note  
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30  
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.  
In this case, start over from step 1.  
9
Press k / n to select the clear mode.  
2
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an control area)  
Clears all learned functions in the respective  
control area. The name of a component is  
shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input  
selector button to select the control area.  
L;AMP  
Clears all learned functions for controlling the  
amplifier functions of this unit.  
Clears all learned functions.  
L;ALL  
M;ALL  
Clears all programmed macros.  
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.  
FCTRY  
Clears all remote functions and returns the  
remote to the factory settings.  
92 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote control features  
Clearing a learned function  
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in  
each control area.  
C
3
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint  
pen or similar object and then press the  
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
1
6
“C;OK” appears in the display window ( ) if  
clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the  
F
SOURCE and then press an input selector  
5
button ( ) to select the control area  
6
display window ( ) on the remote control, release  
containing the function you want to clear.  
the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press  
C
CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote  
The selected component name appears in the display  
control returns to the learning mode.  
6
window ( ).  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
or  
LEARN CLEAR  
AME  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat  
step 3.  
• If you continuously want to clear another function for  
6
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the  
control area, then repeat step 3.  
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the  
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have  
set remote control codes).  
C
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or  
similar object.  
“LEARN” and the selected component name  
(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display  
2
C
Press LEARN again to exit.  
4
Notes  
6
window ( ).  
6
• “C;NG” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from  
step 2.  
LEARN  
6
• “ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if you press more than one button simultaneously.  
Notes  
C
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for  
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote  
control code setting mode.  
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within  
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically  
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.  
93 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote control features  
Clearing a macro function  
You can clear the function programmed for a certain  
macro button.  
C
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint  
pen or similar object, then press the macro  
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.  
2
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
1
6
“C;OK” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
F
C
SOURCE and then press MACRO using  
a ballpoint pen or similar object.  
remote control if clearing was successful.  
6
“MCR ?” appears in the display window ( ) on the  
remote control.  
-
V
AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
OFF ON  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
AME  
MACRO  
or  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat  
step 2.  
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts  
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you  
have set remote control codes).  
Note  
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30  
seconds, the macro programming mode will be  
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.  
C
Press MACRO again to exit the macro  
programming mode.  
3
Notes  
6
• “C;NG” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from  
step 2.  
6
• “ERROR” appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control if you press more than one button simultaneously.  
94 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED SETUP  
Advanced setup  
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional  
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each  
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.  
Notes  
C
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit (see page 28).  
C
D
E
• Only STANDBY/ON, TONE CONTROL and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup  
menu.  
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.  
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.  
Speaker impedance SP IMP.  
Using the advanced setup  
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit  
so that it matches that of your speakers.  
Choices: 8MIN, 6MIN  
C
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
1
2
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 .  
Select “6MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 .  
set this unit to the standby mode.  
D
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and  
SP IMP.  
Speaker  
Impedance level  
C
then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
Front  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 16 or  
higher.  
While holding  
TONE CONTROL  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
8ΩMIN  
Center  
Surround  
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
E
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select  
the parameter you want to adjust.  
The name of the selected parameter appears in the  
front panel display.  
Surround back  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 4 or  
higher.  
SPꢀIMP.-8ꢀMIN  
Front  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
Currently selected  
parameter  
Currently selected  
parameter setting  
6MIN  
D
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to  
Center  
Surround  
4
5
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 6 or  
higher.  
change the selected parameter setting.  
C
Press STANDBY/ON to save the new  
setting and set this unit to the standby mode.  
Surround back  
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on  
this unit.  
95 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced setup  
See page 95 for the operation of the advanced setup.  
A
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
four-digit remote control code for the input  
area you want to use.  
4
Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP  
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote  
control recognition. This feature is useful when you  
operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/  
amplifiers in the same room separately.  
LIVE/CLUB  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
STEREO NHANCER R. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
Choices: ID1, ID2  
MULTI CH IN  
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is  
set to “2201”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is  
set to “2202”.  
9
0
Remote control AMP ID codes  
Setting remote control AMP ID codes  
You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the  
remote control.  
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control  
AMP ID code for the input area you want to use.  
Remote  
control AMP  
ID  
AMP ID code  
(remote control  
setting)  
Function  
F
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or  
1
2
F
SOURCE.  
2201  
To operate this unit using the  
ID1  
(initial setting)  
(initial setting) default code.  
2202 To operate this unit using an  
alternative code.  
C
Press and hold LEARN for about 3  
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar  
ID2  
9
object and then press l / h repeatedly  
until “L;AMP” appears in the display window  
9
Press ENTER to set the number.  
6
“OK” appears in the display window ( ) if setting  
5
6
(
) on the remote control.  
PRESET/CH  
was successful.  
6
“NG” appears in the display window ( ) if the  
LEARN  
setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from  
step 1.  
ENTER  
A/B/C
C
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup  
mode.  
6
LEARN  
Notes  
C
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3  
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.  
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within  
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically  
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.  
9
Press ENTER.  
The four-digit code set for the selected input area  
3
6
appears in the display window ( ) on the remote  
control.  
96 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced setup  
Monitor check MON.CHK  
See page 95 for the operation of the advanced setup.  
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check  
function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”,  
this unit receives the information of the available video  
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via  
HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported  
by the video monitor in “HDMI RES.” (see page 80).  
When “MON. CHK” is set to “SKIP”, you can select any  
resolution in “HDMI RES.”.  
Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP  
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier  
function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”  
automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel  
audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
speaker terminals.  
Choices: YES, SKIP  
Parameter initialization INIT  
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the  
initial factory settings. You can select the category of  
parameters to be initialized.  
Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier  
function.  
Note  
Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL  
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT  
B”, “ZONE B”, or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see  
page 68).  
Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters  
Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in  
“VIDEO SET” (see page 79) and “OSD SHIFT” in  
“DISPLAY SET” (see page 79).  
SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR  
Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the  
REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the  
SCENE mode.  
Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this  
unit.  
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization  
procedure.  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Select “ON” when the component connected to the  
REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has  
the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit  
automatically sends the remote control signals to the  
component.  
Note  
Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to initialize  
the parameters of the desired program (see page 56).  
Select “OFF” when the component connected to the  
REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and  
does not have the capability of the SCENE control  
signals.  
Note  
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set  
“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.  
97 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Troubleshooting  
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below  
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized  
Yamaha dealer or service center.  
General  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
This unit fails to turn  
on or enters the  
standby mode soon  
after the power is  
turned on.  
The power cable is not connected or the  
plug is not completely inserted.  
Connect the power cable firmly.  
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.  
The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this  
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires  
for each connection do not touch anything other than  
their respective connections.  
This unit has been exposed to a strong  
external electric shock (such as lightning or cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use this  
strong static electricity). unit normally.  
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power  
No sound.  
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
The optimizer microphone is connected.  
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.  
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,  
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.  
Audio input jack select is set to  
“ANALOG” while playing a source  
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or  
“COAX/OPT”.  
No appropriate input source has been  
selected.  
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT  
selector on the front panel (or the input selector  
buttons on the remote control).  
Speaker connections are not secure.  
Secure the connections.  
The front speakers to be used have not been  
selected properly.  
A
Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS  
on the front panel repeatedly.  
The volume is turned down.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn up the volume.  
G
G
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote  
control to resume audio output and then adjust the  
volume.  
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are  
being input from a source component, such unit.  
as a CD-ROM.  
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this  
The HDMI components connected to this  
unit do not support the HDCP copy  
protection standards.  
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP  
copy protection standards.  
“S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and  
“HDMI” audio signals are not being played SETUP”.  
back on this unit.  
Set “S.AUDIO” to “DSP-AX863SE” in “MANUAL  
No picture.  
The output and input for the picture are  
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source  
connected to different types of video jacks. components in the same way as you connect your  
video monitor to this unit.  
Non-standard video signals are input.  
The sound suddenly  
goes off.  
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.  
because of a short circuit, etc.  
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each  
other and then turn this unit back on.  
The sleep timer has turned this unit off.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn this unit on, and play the source again.  
G
G
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote  
control to resume audio output.  
Sound is heard from  
the speaker on one  
side only.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”.  
Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.  
98 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Only the center  
speaker outputs  
substantial sound.  
When playing a monaural source with a  
sound field program, the source signal is  
directed to the center channel, and the front  
and surround speakers output effect  
sounds.  
No sound is heard  
from the center  
speaker.  
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE”.  
Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.  
Try another sound field program.  
One of the sound field programs (except  
for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected.  
No sound is heard  
from the presence  
speakers.  
The sound field programs are turned off.  
F
Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.  
You are using a source or program  
combination that does not output sound  
from all channels.  
Try another sound field program.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “PRESENCE”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
speakers.  
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
“NONE”.  
This unit is in the “Straight” mode and a  
monaural source is being played back.  
F
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that  
“Straight” disappears from the front panel display.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
back speakers.  
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting  
“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is  
automatically set to “NONE”.  
other than “NONE”.  
“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.  
“NONE”.  
FRONT B speakers  
cannot be activated.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “FRONT B”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.  
No sound from the  
center, surround or  
surround back  
speakers when the  
FRONT B speakers are  
activated.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to  
“ZONE B”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.  
Presence speaker  
settings are not  
available in “SET  
MENU”.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “PRESENCE”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.  
No sound is heard  
from the subwoofer.  
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.  
to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS  
signal is being played.  
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.  
to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a  
2-channel source is being played.  
The source does not contain low-frequency  
signals.  
Dolby Digital or DTS  
sources cannot be  
played. (Dolby Digital  
or DTS indicator in the  
front panel display  
does not light up.)  
The connected component is not set to  
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital  
signals.  
Make an appropriate setting following the operating  
instructions for your component.  
Audio input jack select is set to  
“ANALOG”.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.  
A humming sound is  
heard.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem  
persists, the cables may be defective.  
No connection from the turntable to the  
GND terminal.  
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the  
GND terminal of this unit.  
The volume level is  
low while a record is  
being played.  
The record is being played on a turntable  
with an MC cartridge.  
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-  
head amplifier.  
The volume level  
cannot be increased,  
or the sound is  
distorted.  
The component connected to the AUDIO  
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.  
Turn on the power of the component.  
99 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The sound effects  
cannot be recorded.  
It is not possible to record the sound effects  
with a recording component.  
A source cannot be  
recorded by a digital  
recording component  
connected to the  
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the DIGITAL  
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.  
INPUT jacks.  
Some components cannot record Dolby  
Digital or DTS sources.  
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.  
A source cannot be  
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO  
recorded by an analog the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.  
component connected  
IN jacks.  
to the AUDIO OUT  
(REC) jacks.  
The sound field  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
parameters and some set to “ON”.  
other settings of this  
unit cannot be  
changed.  
This unit does not  
operate properly.  
The internal microcomputer has been  
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet  
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.  
frozen by an external electric shock (such  
as lightning or excessive static electricity)  
or by a power supply with low voltage.  
No sound is heard  
from the connected  
HDMI component.  
The HDMI component does not accept the Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the  
multi-channel audio signals.  
2-channel audio signals at the source component such  
as a DVD player.  
“CHECK SP WIRES”  
appears in the front  
panel display.  
Speaker cables are short-circuited.  
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.  
There is noise  
interference from  
digital or radio  
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
The picture is  
disturbed.  
The video source uses scrambled or  
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.  
This unit suddenly  
enters the standby  
mode.  
The internal temperature is too high and the Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then  
overheat protection circuitry has been  
activated.  
turn it back on.  
HDMI  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The number of the connected HDMI  
components is over the limit.  
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI  
components.  
No picture or sound.  
HDCP authentication failed.  
Check that the connected HDMI components support  
the HDCP copy protection standards.  
100 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Remote control  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The remote control  
does not work or  
function properly.  
Wrong distance or angle.  
The remote control will function within a maximum  
range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis  
from the front panel.  
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an  
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is  
striking the remote control sensor of this  
unit.  
Reposition this unit.  
The batteries are weak.  
Replace all batteries.  
The operation mode selector is set  
incorrectly.  
Set the operation mode selector correctly.  
F
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP  
position. When operating the component selected by  
F
the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE  
position. When operating the TV set in the  
5
5
F
DTV/CBL or PHONO area, set it to the TV  
position.  
The remote control code was not correctly Set the remote control code correctly using  
set.  
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this  
manual.  
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer  
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this  
manual.  
The library code of the remote control and Match the remote control ID of this unit with the  
the remote control ID of this unit do not  
match.  
corresponding remote control library code.  
Even if the remote control code is  
correctly set, there are some models that  
do not respond to the remote control.  
Program the necessary functions independently into  
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.  
The remote control  
does not learn new  
functions.  
The batteries of this remote control and/or Replace the batteries.  
the other remote control are too weak.  
The distance between the two remote  
controls is too much or too little.  
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.  
The signal coding or modulation of the  
other remote control is not compatible  
with this remote control.  
Learning is not possible.  
Memory capacity is full.  
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for  
the new functions.  
101 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
iPod  
Note  
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod  
See  
page  
Status message  
Cause  
Remedy  
This unit is in the middle of recognizing the  
connection with your iPod.  
Loading...  
This unit is in the middle of acquiring song  
lists from your iPod.  
There is a problem with the signal path  
from your iPod to this unit.  
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod  
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.  
Connect error  
Try resetting your iPod.  
The iPod being used is not supported by  
this unit.  
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod  
mini are supported.  
Unknown iPod  
Your iPod is properly stationed in a  
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-  
10, sold separately) connected to the  
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the  
connection between your iPod and this unit  
is complete.  
iPod connected  
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha  
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to  
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal  
Disconnected  
separately) connected to the DOCK  
terminal of this unit.  
the DOCK terminal of this unit.  
This unit cannot play back the songs  
currently stored on your iPod.  
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are  
playable.  
Unable to play  
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.  
Bluetooth  
See  
page  
Status message  
Cause  
Remedy  
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth  
component is in the middle of the pairing.  
Searching...  
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth  
component is in the middle of establishing  
the connection.  
The paring is completed.  
The paring is canceled.  
Completed  
Canceled  
The connection between the Yamaha  
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold  
separately) and the Bluetooth component is  
established.  
BT connected  
The Bluetooth component is disconnected  
from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such  
as YBA-10, sold separately).  
Disconnected  
The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-  
No BT adapter  
Not found  
the DOCK terminal.  
10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.  
Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-  
10, sold separately) could not find any  
Bluetooth components.  
Another Bluetooth connection has already Terminate the existing connection.  
been established.  
Not Available  
102 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Troubleshooting  
AUTO SETUP  
Before AUTO SETUP  
See  
page  
Error message  
Cause  
Remedy  
Optimizer microphone is not connected.  
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
Connect MIC!  
Headphones are connected.  
Unplug the headphones.  
Unplug HP!  
The parameters of this unit are protected.  
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
Memory Guard!  
During AUTO SETUP  
Error message  
See  
page  
Cause  
Remedy  
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.  
A surround channel signal is not detected.  
A presence channel signal is not detected.  
Check the front L/R speaker connections.  
Check the surround speaker connections.  
Check the presence speaker connections.  
E-1:NO FRONT SP  
E-2:NO SUR SP  
E-3:NO PRNS SP  
E-4:SBR->SBL  
Only a right surround back channel signal is Connect the surround back speaker to the  
detected.  
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS  
terminal if you only have one surround back  
speaker.  
Background noise is too loud.  
Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet  
environment.  
E-5:NOISY  
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air  
conditioners or move them away from the  
optimizer microphone.  
Surround back speakers are connected,  
though surround L/R speakers are not.  
Connect surround speakers when you use  
surround back speakers.  
E-6:CHECK SUR.  
E-7:NO MIC  
The optimizer microphone was unplugged  
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
The optimizer microphone does not detect  
test tones.  
Check the microphone setting.  
E-8:NO SIGNAL  
Check the speaker connections and  
placement.  
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was  
cancelled due to user activity.  
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
E-9:USER CANCEL  
An internal error occurred.  
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR  
103 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Troubleshooting  
After AUTO SETUP  
See  
page  
Warning message  
Cause  
Remedy  
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message Check the speaker connections for proper  
may appear depending on the speakers even polarity (+ or –).  
when the speakers are connected correctly.  
W-1:OUT OF PHASE  
The distance between the speaker and the  
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).  
Bring the speaker closer to the listening  
position.  
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)  
W-3:LEVEL ERROR  
The difference of volume level among  
speakers is excessive.  
Readjust the speaker installation so that all  
speakers are set in locations with similar  
conditions.  
Check the speaker connections.  
Use speakers of similar quality.  
When “SWFR: TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:  
TOO LOW” appears in the result screen, the  
output volume of the subwoofer.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to  
“PRESENCE”, though the presence channel  
signals are not detected.  
Check the presence speaker connections.  
W-4:CHECK PRNS  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting other  
than “PRESENCE”.  
Notes  
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
• If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2”, or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.  
• If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.  
104 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
RESETTING THE SYSTEM  
Resetting the system  
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.  
Notes  
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters.  
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.  
y
C
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel.  
C
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
1
2
set this unit to the standby mode.  
D
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and  
C
then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this  
unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
While holding  
TONE CONTROL  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
E
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select  
3
4
“INIT”.  
D
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to  
select “ALL”.  
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure  
without making any changes.  
C
Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your  
selection and set this unit to the standby  
mode.  
5
105 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GLOSSARY  
Glossary  
Audio and video synchronization  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you  
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front  
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,  
Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an  
additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low  
Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is  
counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the  
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and  
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby  
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum  
volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise  
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing  
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.  
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-  
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.  
(lip sync)  
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical  
term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining  
audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and  
transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires  
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an  
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices  
to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately  
without user interaction.  
Bi-amplification connection  
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.  
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker  
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter  
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a  
restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each  
amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely  
to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the  
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass  
filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a  
cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.  
Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from  
5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that  
derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.  
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie  
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this  
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and  
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with  
“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.  
Component video signal  
With the component video signal system, the video signal is  
separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR  
signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more  
faithfully with this system because each of these signals is  
independent. The component signal is also called the “color  
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted  
from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is  
required in order to output component signals.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed  
for high-definition programming and media including HD  
broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory  
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for  
Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with  
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,  
Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels  
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for  
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,  
Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the  
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby  
Digital.  
Composite video signal  
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is  
composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,  
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a  
video component transmits these three elements combined.  
Deep Color  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,  
up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI  
specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other  
displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and  
eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions  
and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio  
can represent many times more shades of gray between black and  
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors  
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast  
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new  
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left  
and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right  
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro  
Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music  
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and  
“Game mode” for game sources.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-  
channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There  
are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,  
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)  
and “Game mode” for game sources.  
106 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Dolby Surround  
DTS Express  
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to  
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and  
right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),  
and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The  
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency  
range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes  
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The  
Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital  
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume  
on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and  
directionality.  
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional  
feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,  
low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet  
applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio  
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.  
These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the  
additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on  
demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are  
mixed down with the main audio stream on the player  
component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to  
the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or  
analog connections.  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology  
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD  
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard  
for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,  
this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the  
studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.  
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up  
to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.  
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc  
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD  
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel  
audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby  
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range  
control.  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio  
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media  
including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional  
audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this  
technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from  
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.  
Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps  
for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up  
to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.  
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc  
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing  
multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital  
Surround.  
DSD  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on  
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,  
signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency  
sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and  
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence  
with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high  
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that  
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.  
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology  
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD  
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard  
for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers  
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a  
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to  
18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,  
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of  
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version  
1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/  
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains  
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems  
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for  
multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-  
compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz  
sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”  
refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality  
transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel  
sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and  
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.  
HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first  
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video  
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a  
set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a  
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-  
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a  
single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and  
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to  
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.  
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video  
interface that meets the security requirements of content  
providers and system operators. For further information on  
HDMI, visit the HDMI website at  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog  
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and  
is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the  
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you  
can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of  
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces  
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front  
left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1  
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit  
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel  
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing  
5.1-channel format.  
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.  
107 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
LFE 0.1 channel  
“x.v.Color”  
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency  
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is  
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range  
compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels  
in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.  
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a  
more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression  
of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining  
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”  
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural  
images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer  
graphics.  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel  
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the  
full-range channels with higher separation just like digital  
discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music  
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.  
PCM (Linear PCM)  
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio  
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any  
compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and  
DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the  
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for  
“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses  
and then modulated for recording.  
Sampling frequency and number of  
quantized bits  
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the  
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,  
while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into  
a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range  
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the  
sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound  
level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In  
principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range  
of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number  
of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be  
reproduced.  
S-video signal  
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally  
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y  
signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance  
through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates  
video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback  
of even more beautiful images.  
108 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION  
Sound field program information  
Elements of a sound field  
SILENT CINEMA  
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument  
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In  
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable  
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size  
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.  
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that  
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the  
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s  
instrument.  
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect  
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for  
headphones have been set for each sound field so that  
accurate representations of all the sound field programs  
can be enjoyed on headphones.  
Virtual CINEMA DSP  
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm  
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects  
even without any surround speakers by using virtual  
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual  
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that  
does not include a center speaker.  
Early reflections  
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms  
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one  
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).  
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.  
Compressed Music Enhancer  
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit  
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the  
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,  
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency  
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-  
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved  
performance of the overall sound system.  
Reverberations  
These are caused by reflections from more than one  
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so  
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous  
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the  
clarity of the direct sound.  
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent  
reverberations taken together help us to determine the  
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this  
information that the digital sound field processor  
reproduces in order to create sound fields.  
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and  
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you  
would be able to create your own listening environment.  
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a  
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any  
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is  
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field  
processor.  
CINEMA DSP  
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were  
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect  
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for  
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room  
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can  
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in  
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured  
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound  
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby  
Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual  
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your  
own home.  
109 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIFICATIONS  
Specifications  
Volume Control ....................................... MUTE/–80 dB to 16.5 dB  
AUDIO SECTION  
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,  
Surround back  
• Tone Control (Front L/R)  
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... 10 dB/50 Hz  
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz  
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz  
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz  
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 .................................... 105 W  
• Dynamic Power (IHF)  
Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 ..................................... 140/175/205/250 W  
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)  
H.P.F.  
• Maximum Output Power  
Speaker impedance setting: 8 , 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω  
.......................................................................................... 155 W  
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR.B L/R SP:  
SMALL/SML) ............................................................ 12 dB/oct.  
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.  
• IEC Output Power  
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ................................... 115 W  
VIDEO SECTION  
• Damping Factor (IHF)  
Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω  
.................................................................................. 120 or more  
• Video Format (Gray Back) ......................................................... PAL  
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL  
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance  
• Signal Level  
PHONO (MM) ........................................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ  
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ  
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ  
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 (C)  
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 (PB/PR)  
• Maximum Input Voltage  
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)  
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more  
PHONO (MM)  
1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............................................. 60 mV or more  
CD, etc.  
• Signal to Noise Ratio  
.................................................................................... 50 dB or more  
Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ............................... 2.3 V or more  
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)  
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance  
Component (Video Conversion Off)  
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, –3 dB  
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ  
PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ  
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL)  
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ  
GENERAL  
• Power Supply ........................................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance  
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω  
• Power Consumption ............................................................... 440 W  
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less  
• AC Outlets ...................................................... 1 (100 W maximum)  
• Frequency Response  
CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz  
...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB  
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm  
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in)  
• RIAA Equalization Deviation  
PHONO (MM) ............................................................. 0 0.5 dB  
• Weight .............................................................. 11.9 kg (26 lbs 4 oz)  
• Total Harmonic Distortion  
PHONO (MM) to OUT (REC)  
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V ............................................ 0.02% or less  
CD, etc. to Front L/R  
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 ............... 0.06% or less  
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)  
PHONO (MM, 5 mV) to OUT (REC)  
.............................................................................. 81 dB or more  
CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R  
............................................................................ 100 dB or more  
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)  
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less  
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)  
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more  
CD, etc. (5.1 kshortened) to Front L/R  
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more  
110 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
Index  
BITRATE, Audio information .............45  
Bluetooth adapter connection ...............25  
Bluetooth component playback ............54  
Bluetooth component use .....................54  
Bluetooth, Troubleshooting ................102  
BT connected,  
Connection, PVR ................................. 22  
Connection, set-top boxes ................... 22  
Connection, speaker cable ................... 16  
Connection,  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ....... 24  
Connection,  
Numerics  
1 BASIC MENU, Manual setup ..........63  
2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup .....64  
2ch STEREO, Sound field program ....49  
3 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........64  
4 INPUT MENU, Manual setup ..........65  
5 OPTION MENU, Manual setup .......65  
7ch Enhancer, Sound field program ....49  
7ch STEREO, Sound field program ....49  
96/24 indicator .....................................29  
Bluetooth status message ...............102  
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks .......... 24  
Connection,  
C
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ........ 24  
Connection, Tape deck ........................ 23  
Connection, TUNER ........................... 23  
Connection, Turntable ......................... 23  
Connection, TV monitor ...................... 20  
Connection, VCR ................................ 22  
CROSS OVER, Speaker settings ........ 70  
CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 61  
Current status display .......................... 43  
C)DYNAMIC RANGE, Sound menu .....74  
C)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .....81  
C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............71  
Cable plugs ...........................................17  
Canceled, Bluetooth status message ..102  
CD player connection ...........................23  
CD recorder connection .......................23  
Cellar Club, Sound field program ........48  
CENTER PRE OUT jack connection ......24  
CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............69  
Center speaker level, Sound field  
parameter ..........................................61  
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........69  
CENTER WIDTH,  
Decoder parameter ...........................62  
Chamber, Sound field program ............47  
CHANNEL, Audio information ...........45  
Charge on standby, Input menu ...........77  
CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup  
A
A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu .........79  
A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu .............73  
A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ...........68  
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) ..........27  
Action Game, Sound field program .....48  
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator .................29  
ADAPTIVE DRC, Volume menu .......72  
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL,  
D
D)INIT. CONFIG, Option menu ......... 81  
D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 75  
D)TEST TONE, Basic menu ............... 71  
Decoder descriptions ........................... 62  
Decoder indicators ............................... 29  
DECODER MODE,  
Initial configuration ......................... 81  
Decoder mode, Initial configuration ....... 81  
DECODER MODE, Input menu ......... 77  
Decoder mode, Input menu ................. 77  
Decoder selection ................................ 61  
DEVICE OVER,  
Volume menu ..................................72  
Adaptive DSP level, Volume menu .....72  
Adaptive dynamic range control,  
Volume menu ..................................72  
Advanced setup ....................................95  
Advanced sound configurations ...........56  
Adventure, Sound field program .........49  
Amplifier function OSD display time,  
Display settings ................................79  
ANALOG RES., Video information .......45  
Audio and video synchronization,  
warning message ............................104  
CHECK SP WIRES .............................14  
CHECK SUR., Automatic setup  
error message .................................103  
CINEMA DSP indicator ......................29  
CLASSICAL, Sound field category .....47  
Clear settings, Remote control .............92  
CLEAR, Remote control ......................92  
Completed,  
Bluetooth status message ...............102  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............17  
Compressed Music Enhancer ...............49  
Connect error, iPod status message .......102  
Connect MIC!, Automatic setup  
error message .................................103  
Connection, audio components ............23  
Connection, Bluetooth adapter .............25  
Connection, CD player .........................23  
Connection, CD recorder .....................23  
Connection,  
CENTER PRE OUT jack .................24  
Connection, DVD player ......................21  
Connection, DVD recorder ..................22  
Connection, External amplifier ............24  
Connection, external decoder ...............25  
Connection,  
HDMI error message ....................... 45  
DIALG.LIFT,  
Sound menu .....................................75  
Audio cable plugs ................................17  
Audio components connection .............23  
Audio information ................................45  
Audio input jacks selection ..................43  
AUDIO jacks .......................................17  
Audio jacks ..........................................17  
AUDIO SELECT .................................43  
AUDIO SELECT,  
Initial configuration .........................81  
Audio select, Initial configuration .......81  
Audio signal flow .................................19  
AUTO DELAY, Lip sync ....................75  
Auto delay, Lip sync ............................75  
AUTO SETUP ...............................31, 63  
Auto setup ............................................63  
AUTO SETUP, Troubleshooting .......103  
Available decoders with  
Sound field parameter ..................... 57  
Dialogue lift, Sound field parameter ...... 57  
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 17  
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 17  
DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 62  
DIMMER, Display settings ................. 79  
Dimmer, Display settings .................... 79  
DIRECT, Sound field parameter ......... 61  
Disconnected,  
Bluetooth status message .............. 102  
Disconnected, iPod status message ...... 102  
Display settings, Option menu ............ 79  
DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 33  
DOCK indicator ................................... 29  
Drama, Sound field program ............... 49  
DSP effect level,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 57  
DSP indicators ..................................... 29  
DSP LEVEL,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 57  
DVD player connection ....................... 21  
DVD recorder connection .................... 22  
Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 74  
Sound field programs .......................61  
B
B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............74  
B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................70  
BASIC MENU, Manual setup .............68  
Basic menu, Manual setup ...................63  
Bass cross over, Speaker settings ........70  
BGV, Input menu .................................78  
BI-AMP, Advanced setup ....................97  
Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup .............97  
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ..................24  
Connection, iPod universal dock ..........25  
Connection, MD recorder .....................23  
Connection, Multi-format player .........25  
Connection, Power cable ......................27  
Connection, projector ...........................20  
E
E)EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 75  
E)HDMI SET, Option menu ................ 82  
111 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
E-1:NO FRONT SP, Automatic setup  
error message ................................. 103  
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR, Automatic  
setup error message ....................... 103  
E-2:NO SUR SP, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-3:NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-4:SBR->SBL, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-5:NOISY, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-6:CHECK SUR., Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-7:NO MIC, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-8:NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error  
message .......................................... 103  
E-9:USER CANCEL, Automatic setup  
error message ................................. 103  
EFFECT LEVEL,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 61  
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 29  
ENTERTAINMENT,  
Sound field category ........................ 48  
EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 73  
EQ, Auto setup parameter .................... 32  
Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 73  
Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 73  
EXTD SUR., Initial configuration ....... 81  
Extended surround,  
Hall in Vienna,  
Sound field program ........................47  
HDCP ERROR,  
Lip Sync, Sound menu ........................ 75  
LIVE/CLUB, Sound field category ..... 48  
LIVENESS, Sound field parameter ..... 59  
Liveness, Sound field parameter ......... 59  
Loading, iPod status message ............ 102  
Low-frequency effect level,  
HDMI Error message .......................45  
HDMI ...................................................18  
HDMI aspect ratio ................................80  
HDMI ASPECT, Video settings ..........80  
HDMI AUTO, Lip sync .......................75  
HDMI auto, Lip sync ...........................75  
HDMI error and message .....................45  
HDMI ERROR, Video information .....45  
HDMI indicator ....................................29  
HDMI RES., Video information ..........45  
HDMI RES., Video settings .................80  
HDMI resolution, Video settings .........80  
HDMI set, Option menu .......................82  
HDMI SIGNAL, Video information ....45  
HDMI, troubleshooting ......................100  
HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ...........74  
HEADPHONE,  
Sound menu ..................................... 74  
LVL, Auto setup result ........................ 33  
M
Macro programming,  
Remote control settings ................... 89  
MANUAL DELAY, Lip sync ............. 75  
Manual delay, Lip sync ....................... 75  
MANUAL SETUP .............................. 63  
Manual setup ....................................... 63  
MAX VOL., Volume menu ................. 72  
Maximum volume ............................... 72  
Maximum volume, Volume menu ....... 72  
MCR ?, Remote control ....................... 91  
MD recorder connection ...................... 23  
Memory Guard!,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
Memory guard, Option menu .............. 81  
MON.CHK, Advanced setup ............... 97  
Monitor check, Advanced setup .......... 97  
Mono Movie, Sound field program ..... 49  
MOVIE, Sound field category ............. 48  
MULTI CH INPUT  
component selection ........................ 42  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 25  
Multi-channel input BGV,  
Input menu ...................................... 78  
Multi-channel input channels,  
Input menu ...................................... 78  
Multi-channel input front left and right  
channel input jack, Input menu ....... 78  
Multi-channel source playback  
with headphones .............................. 50  
Multi-format player connection ........... 25  
Multi-information display ................... 30  
MUSIC ENHANCER,  
Low frequency effect level ..............74  
Headphones ..........................................44  
Headphones indicator ...........................29  
Headphones, Dynamic range ...............74  
Headphones,  
Low frequency effect level ..............74  
I
I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu .........76  
Infrared window ...................................30  
INIT, Advanced setup ..........................97  
INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......58  
INIT.VOL., Volume menu ...................72  
Initial configuration, Option menu .......81  
Initial delay, Sound field parameter .....58  
Initial volume, Volume menu ..............72  
INPUT CH, Input menu .......................78  
Input channel and speaker indicators ......30  
Input channel indicators .......................30  
INPUT MENU, Manual setup .............76  
Input menu, Manual setup ....................65  
INPUT RENAME, Input menu ............77  
Input rename, Input menu ....................77  
Input signal indicators ..........................29  
Input source indicators .........................29  
Input source information display .........45  
Input/output assignment,  
Initial configuration ......................... 81  
Extended surround, Sound menu ......... 75  
External amplifier connection .............. 24  
External decoder connection ................ 25  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,  
Auto setup parameter ....................... 32  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,  
Speaker settings ............................... 68  
Extra speaker assignment,  
Auto setup parameter ....................... 32  
Extra speaker assignment,  
Speaker settings ............................... 68  
Sound field category ....................... 49  
Music Video, Sound field program ..... 48  
MUTE .................................................. 44  
MUTE indicator .................................. 29  
MUTE TYPE, Volume menu .............. 72  
Muting ................................................. 44  
Muting type, Volume menu ................. 72  
F
FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 79  
FLAG, Audio information ................... 45  
FORMAT, Audio information ............. 45  
Front panel display ............................... 29  
Front panel display scroll,  
Display settings ............................... 79  
FRONT PRE OUT jack connection ..... 24  
FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 69  
Front speaker set selection ................... 42  
Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 69  
FRONT, Input menu ............................ 78  
Input menu .......................................76  
INTERNAL ERROR,  
Automatic setup error message ......103  
iPod connected, iPod status message ....102  
iPod universal dock connection ...........25  
iPod use ................................................52  
iPod, Trouble shooting .......................102  
N
Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type ........ 61, 62  
Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 62  
No BT Adapter,  
Bluetooth status message .............. 102  
NO FRONT SP,  
J
Jacks .....................................................17  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
NO MIC,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
NO PRNS SP,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
NO SIGNAL,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
G
L
GEQ, Equalizer .................................... 73  
Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................ 73  
LEARN, Remote control settings ........87  
LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup  
warning message ............................104  
LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......68  
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............68  
H
Hall in Munich,  
Sound field program ........................ 47  
112 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
NO SUR SP,  
Automatic setup error message ...... 103  
NOISY,  
Automatic setup error message ...... 103  
Not Available,  
Bluetooth status message ...............102  
Not found,  
Bluetooth status message ...............102  
Number of speakers,  
Auto setup result ..............................33  
Pure Direct ...........................................51  
Pure hi-fi sound ....................................51  
PVR connection ...................................22  
SIGNAL INFO .................................... 45  
Signal information ............................... 66  
SILENT CINEMA ............................... 50  
SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 30  
SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 61  
SLEEP indicator .................................. 30  
Sleep timer ........................................... 46  
Sound field indicators .......................... 29  
Sound field parameter changing .......... 56  
Sound field programs .......................... 47  
Sound field programs  
with headphones .............................. 50  
Sound field programs  
without surround speakers ............... 50  
SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........... 73  
Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 64  
Source feature OSD display time,  
R
Rear panel .............................................10  
REMOTE AMP, Advanced setup ........96  
Remote control AMP ID,  
Advanced setup ................................96  
Remote control code setting .................85  
Remote control, Trouble shooting ......101  
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ......................26  
Rename, SCENE template ...................39  
Repeat ...................................................53  
Repeat, iPod playback ..........................53  
Resetting the system ...........................105  
REV.DELAY,  
Sound field parameter ......................60  
REV.LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......60  
REV.TIME, Sound field parameter .....60  
Reverberation delay,  
Sound field parameter ......................60  
Reverberation level,  
Sound field parameter ......................60  
Reverberation time,  
Sound field parameter ......................60  
Roleplaying Game,  
Sound field program ........................48  
ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ......59  
Room size, Sound field parameter .......59  
O
Operation mode selector ......................30  
OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................31  
Optimizing the speaker setting for your  
listening room ..................................31  
OPTION MENU, Manual setup ..........79  
Option menu, Manual setup .................65  
OPTN, Remote control ........................85  
OSD SHIFT, Display settings ..............79  
OSD shift, Display settings ..................79  
OSD-AMP, Display settings ................79  
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........79  
OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup  
Display settings ............................... 79  
source name setting,  
Remote control settings ................... 88  
SP A B indicators ................................ 29  
SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 95  
SP, Auto setup result ........................... 33  
Speaker cable connection .................... 16  
Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 33  
Speaker distance, Basic menu ............. 71  
Speaker distances ................................. 71  
Speaker impedance setting .................. 27  
Speaker impedance, Advanced setup ..... 95  
Speaker level adjustment ..................... 51  
Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 33  
Speaker level, Basic menu ................... 70  
Speaker settings, Basic menu .............. 68  
SPEAKER, Dynamic range ................. 74  
SPEAKER,  
warning message ............................ 104  
Out of Res., HDMI message ................45  
OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup  
warning message ............................ 104  
P
P.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ......58  
P.ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ......................59  
Pairing, Bluetooth operation ................54  
PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ......62  
Parameter initialization,  
Advanced setup ................................97  
Parametric equalizer type,  
Auto setup parameter .......................32  
PHONES jack ......................................44  
PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......61  
Playing video sources  
in the background ............................44  
PLII Game, Decoder type ....................62  
PLII Movie, Decoder type .............61, 62  
PLII Music, Decoder type ....................62  
PLIIx Game, Decoder type ..................62  
PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ...........61, 62  
PLIIx Music, Decoder type ..................62  
Power cable connection .......................27  
PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter .....61  
Presence left speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ......................61  
Presence right speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ......................61  
Presence sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ......................58  
Presence sound field room size,  
Sound field parameter ......................59  
Presence speaker indicators .................30  
Presence speaker using ........................13  
Preset SCENE templates ......................38  
Pro Logic, Decoder type ......................62  
Projector connection ............................20  
S
S VIDEO jacks .....................................17  
S.Audio, HDMI set ..............................82  
S.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......58  
S.LIVENESS, Sound field parameter .....59  
S.ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ......................59  
SAMPLING, Audio information .........45  
SB INI.DLY, Sound field parameter .......58  
SB LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......61  
SB LIVENESS,  
Low frequency effect level .............. 74  
Speakers, Dynamic range .................... 74  
Speakers,  
Low frequency effect level .............. 74  
Specifications .................................... 110  
Spectacle, Sound field program ........... 48  
Sports, Sound field program ................ 48  
SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 61  
Standard, Sound field program ............ 48  
STANDBY CHARGE, Input menu .... 77  
START PAIRING, Input menu ........... 78  
Start pairing, Input menu ..................... 78  
STEREO, Sound field category ........... 49  
Straight ................................................ 50  
Straight Enhancer,  
Sound field program ........................ 49  
Straight mode ....................................... 50  
SUBWOOFER PHASE,  
Speaker settings ............................... 70  
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ..... 70  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
Sound field parameter ......................59  
SB ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ......................59  
SBR->SBL,  
Automatic setup error message ......103  
SCENE 1 ................................................8  
SCENE 2 ................................................8  
SCENE 3 ................................................8  
SCENE 4 ................................................8  
SCENE IR code setting,  
Advanced setup ................................97  
SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................97  
SCENE template rename ......................39  
Sci-Fi, Sound field program .................48  
Selection, Audio input jacks ................43  
Selection, Front speaker set ..................42  
Selection,  
jack connection ................................ 24  
Supplied accessories .............................. 2  
Support audio, HDMI set .................... 82  
SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 69  
SUR.B L/R SP, Speaker settings ......... 69  
SUR.BACK PRE OUT  
MULTI CH INPUT component .......42  
Selection, SCENE template .................36  
SET MENU usage ................................67  
Set-top box connection .........................22  
Shuffle, iPod playback .........................53  
jack connection ................................ 24  
113 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Surround back left/right speakers,  
Speaker settings ............................... 69  
Surround back sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 58  
Surround back sound field liveness,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 59  
Surround back sound field room size,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 59  
Surround back speaker level,  
Video jacks ...........................................17  
VIDEO SET, Option menu ..................79  
Video settings, Option menu ................79  
Video signal flow .................................19  
Video sources in the background .........44  
Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................50  
VIRTUAL indicator .............................30  
VOL. TRIM, Input menu .....................77  
VOLUME level indicator .....................29  
VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ........72  
Volume menu, Manual setup ...............64  
Volume Trim, Input menu ...................77  
Sound field parameter ...................... 61  
Surround decode mode ........................ 61  
Surround left speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 61  
Surround left/right speakers,  
W
W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup  
warning message ............................104  
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup  
warning message ............................104  
W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup  
warning message ............................104  
W-4:CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup  
warning message ............................104  
Speaker settings ............................... 69  
SURROUND PRE OUT  
jack connection ................................ 24  
Surround right speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 61  
Surround sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 58  
Surround sound field liveness,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 59  
Surround sound field room size,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 59  
Y
YPAO indicator ....................................29  
Z
T
Zone B ..................................................42  
Tape deck connection .......................... 23  
Test tone, Basic menu .......................... 71  
Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 73  
TEST, Equalizer ................................... 73  
The Bottom Line,  
Sound field program ........................ 48  
The Roxy Theatre,  
Sound field program ........................ 48  
Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 51  
Transmit indicator ................................ 30  
Troubleshooting ................................... 98  
TUNER connection .............................. 23  
Turning off ........................................... 28  
Turning on ............................................ 28  
Turntable connection ........................... 23  
TV controlling by remote control ........ 83  
TV monitor connection ........................ 20  
U
Unable to play, iPod status message ..... 102  
UNIT, Speaker distance ....................... 71  
Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 71  
Unknown iPod,  
iPod status message ....................... 102  
Unplug HP!,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
Unprocessed input sources ................... 50  
USER CANCEL,  
Automatic setup error message ..... 103  
A
5
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD”  
(example) indicates the name of  
the parts on the front panel or the  
remote control. Refer to the  
attached sheet or the pages at the  
end of this manual for the  
information about each position of  
the parts.  
V
VCR connection ................................... 22  
VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 26  
VIDEO CONV., Video settings ........... 79  
Video conversion, Video settings ........ 79  
Video information ................................ 45  
VIDEO jacks ........................................ 17  
114 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland  
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from  
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our  
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).  
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha  
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge  
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been  
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.  
Conditions  
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a  
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the  
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.  
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.  
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.  
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:  
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.  
b. Damage resulting from:  
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.  
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to  
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.  
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper  
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in  
the country where it is used.  
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.  
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.  
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety  
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.  
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.  
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or  
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)  
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.  
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the  
product.  
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.  
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising  
from their sales/purchase contract.  
115 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel  
A
B
VOLUME  
SPEAKERS  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
1
2
D
E
POWER  
POWER  
AV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
TV  
3
4
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
5
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
SELECT  
6
7
AMP  
+
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
SOURCE  
F
G
VOLUME  
TV  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
PRESET/CH  
H
I
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
AUDIO  
8
9
0
SRCH MODE  
O
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
J
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
STRAIGHT  
RETURN  
K
L
LIVE/CLUB  
MEMORY  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
LIVE/CLUB  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
A
MULTI CH IN  
0
9
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
0
+10  
9
M
N
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
P
Q
R
B
C
REC  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
OFF ON  
RENAME  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of remote control codes  
CAIRN  
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS  
0056  
CARVER  
CYRUS  
DKK  
DMX ELECTRONICS  
0184  
DENON  
DYNAMIC BASS  
0206  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
0184  
SM ELECTRONIC  
0757  
CABLE  
ABC  
AMERICAST 0926  
BELL SOUTH 0926  
BIRMINGHAM CABLE  
CD RECORDER  
0030, 0035  
KENWOOD  
MARANTZ  
PHILIPS  
0653  
0653  
0653  
2400  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
SHARP  
0600  
0697  
0657  
0184, 0206  
0184  
0027  
YAMAHA  
SHERWOOD 0797  
SHINSONIC 0560  
COMMUNICATI  
ONS  
0303  
SLIM ART  
SONY  
SYLVANIA  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
0811  
0560, 0891  
0702  
0797  
0598, 0744  
0517  
DVD PLAYER  
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS  
0900  
BRITISH TELECOM  
0030  
CABLE & WIRELESS  
1095  
0757  
0332  
0206  
ALBA  
AMSTRAD  
0744  
0740  
TECHNICS  
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,  
1904  
GENEXXA  
0059, 0332  
APEX DIGITAL  
THETA DIGITAL  
0598  
GOODMANS 0332  
GRUNDIG 0184  
HARMAN/KARDON  
0184, 0200  
0059  
0699, 0744, 0782,  
0821, 0823, 0857,  
1127  
DIRECTOR  
FILMNET  
0503  
0470  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
0549  
0530  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
0030, 0303, 0503,  
BLAUPINKT 0744  
BLUE PARADE  
0598  
URBAN CONCEPTS  
0530  
HITACHI  
JVC  
0837,  
0099  
XBOX  
0549  
GOLDSTAR 0171  
KENWOOD  
KRELL  
LXI  
LINN  
MCS  
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332  
MARANTZ  
MATSUI  
MEMOREX  
MERIDIAN  
MICROMEGA 0184  
0055, 0064  
0184  
0332  
0184  
0056  
BUSH  
CENTREX  
0740  
0699  
YAMAHA  
0517, 0566, 0572,  
2100  
0530, 0618, 0768  
0811  
HAMLIN  
JERROLD  
0036, 0300  
0030, 0303, 0503,  
CLATRONIC 0815  
CYBERHOME  
0741  
DVD2000  
DAEWOO  
DANSAI  
DECCA  
DENON  
DIAMOND  
DIGITREX  
EMERSON  
ZENITH  
ZEUS  
0837  
0171  
0470  
0027  
LG  
MNET  
MEMOREX  
0548  
0811, 0797  
0797  
0797  
0517  
0795  
0699  
0618  
Blu-lay Disc player  
PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802  
SAMSUNG  
0056, 0184  
0184  
0332  
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,  
1133  
2816  
NTL  
NOOS  
ONO  
1095  
0844  
1095  
0184  
DVD RECORDER  
PANASONIC 2800  
YAMAHA  
MIRO  
0027  
0184  
0184  
0027  
0184  
0184  
0027, 0059, 0064,  
0206, 0332  
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX  
0030  
MISSION  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
NSM  
NAIM  
ENTERPRISE 0618  
FISHER  
GE  
2807  
PACE  
0264, 1087, 1095  
0697  
0549, 0744  
0742  
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134  
HD DVD PLAYER  
TOSHIBA  
PARAGON  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
0027  
GO VIDEO  
2103  
0332, 0344  
0171, 0560, 0904,  
1904  
OPTIMUS  
GOLDSTAR 0768  
GRADIENTE 0678  
GREENHILL 0744  
LD PLAYER  
PANASONIC 0056  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
REGAL  
RUNCO  
SAGEM  
SAMSUNG  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
0035, 0504, 0904,  
0027  
0027  
0300, 0306  
0027  
0844  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
POLK AUDIO 0184  
PROTON  
QED  
QUAD  
QUASAR  
RCA  
REALISTIC  
REVOX  
ROTEL  
SAE  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
SEARS  
SHARP  
SIMAUDIO  
SONIC FRONTIERS  
0184  
SONY  
SYMPHONIC 0332  
TAG MCLAREN  
0184  
0184  
0059, 0332  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
HITEKER  
JVC  
KLH  
KENWOOD  
KOSS  
0566  
0600, 0691  
0699  
0585, 0650  
0744  
0517, 0561  
0678  
CARVER  
DENON  
MARANTZ  
MITSUBISHI 0086  
0091  
0086  
0091  
0184  
0184  
0184  
0056  
0059, 0206, 0332  
0206  
0184  
0184  
0184  
0184, 0332  
0206  
0332  
0332  
0064  
NAD  
0086  
0086  
0086  
0091  
0086  
0091  
0228  
0027, 0171  
NAGSMI  
OPTIMUS  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
SALORA  
SONY  
LG  
LIMIT  
0768  
0795  
1904  
1033  
0030  
SONY  
STARCOM  
SUPERCABLE  
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702  
MARANTZ  
MEMOREX  
MICO  
MICROSOFT 0549  
MINTEK 0744  
MITSUBISHI 0548  
MUSTEK  
NESA  
ONKYO  
ORITRON  
PALSONIC  
0566  
0858  
0750  
TELEFUNKEN  
0303  
0030  
0470  
1095  
0030  
0027  
0303  
0086  
2200  
TS  
YAMAHA  
TELE+1  
TELEWEST  
TORX  
TOSHIBA  
TRANS PX  
MD RECORDER  
KENWOOD  
ONKYO  
SHARP  
SONY  
YAMAHA  
0757  
0744  
0530  
0678  
0699  
0184  
0708  
0895  
0888  
0517  
UNITED CABLE  
0030  
0027, 0552, 0926  
0027  
ZENITH  
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389  
PHILIPS  
2500, 2501, 2502  
0530, 0566, 0673,  
0881  
0552, 0598, 0658,  
0659  
CD PLAYER  
AIWA  
ARCAM  
AUDIO RESEARCH  
0184  
AUDIO TON 0184  
AUDIOLAB  
AUDIOMECA 0184  
RECEIVER (TUNER)  
ADC  
AIWA  
TANDY  
0059  
0056  
0184  
0184  
PIONEER  
0184  
0184  
TECHNICS  
THORENS  
THULE  
0558  
POLK AUDIO 0566  
0185, 1116, 1415,  
1432, 1668  
1417  
PROSCAN  
QWESTAR  
RCA  
0549  
0678  
0549, 0598, 0744  
0650  
UNIVERSUM 0184  
ALCO  
ANAM  
APEX DIGITAL  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
YAMAHA  
0099  
0184  
2300, 2301  
1636  
0184  
ROTEL  
1284  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIOLAB  
AUDIOTRONIC  
1216  
AUDIOVOX 1417  
BOSE 1256  
1216  
MANHATTAN  
HARMAN/KARDON  
0056  
MAGNAVOX 0056  
SATELLITE TUNER  
0482, 1044, 1110  
@SAT  
ABSAT  
ALBA  
1327  
0150  
0482  
MARANTZ  
MEDIASAT  
MEMOREX  
METRONIC  
MITSUBISHI 0776  
MOTOROLA 0896  
0227  
0880  
0751  
0111  
MARANTZ  
MYRYAD  
OPTIMUS  
PHILIPS  
0056  
0056  
0054  
0056  
0054  
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS  
ALPHASTAR 0799  
1397  
CAPETRONIC  
0558  
AMSTRAD  
ASTON  
ASTRO  
0874  
0169, 1156  
0200  
PIONEER  
MYRYAD  
0227  
POLK AUDIO 0056  
CARVER  
CENTREX  
DENON  
FERGUSON 0558  
FINE ARTS  
GRUNDIG  
HARMAN/KARDON  
0137, 1331  
INTEGRA  
JBL  
1116, 1216  
1284  
1387  
ATSAT  
AVALON  
1327  
0423  
NEXT LEVEL 0896  
RCA  
0054  
0056  
0056  
0270  
0056  
0054  
2700,2701  
NOKIA  
0482, 0750, 0778,  
REVOX  
SANSUI  
SONY  
THORENS  
WARDS  
YAMAHA  
BLAUPUNKT 0200  
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING  
0874, 1202  
CANAL DIGITAL  
0880  
CANAL SATELLITE  
0880  
CANAL+  
1154, 1250, 1750  
1032  
1127  
0482, 0874, 1202,  
1350  
OCTALTV  
ORBITECH  
PACE  
1216  
1216  
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,  
1347  
0162, 1325  
0137, 1333  
0101, 0558, 1401,  
1522  
1417, 1439  
1054, 1340  
0066  
TV  
AGB  
AOC  
0880  
PANDA  
PAYSAT  
PHILIPS  
0482  
0751  
0160, 0227, 0482,  
0749, 0751, 0776,  
0880, 1103, 1169,  
1776  
JVC  
CHAPARRAL 0243  
CITYCOM  
CONNEXIONS  
0543  
1203  
0423  
0036, 0057, 0087,  
0119, 0120, 0135,  
0205, 0207, 0478  
0131  
0036  
0036  
0119, 0135, 0680  
0120, 0190, 0490  
0788  
KLH  
KENWOOD  
MCS  
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,  
1296,  
MARANTZ  
CROSSDIGITAL  
1136  
CYRUS  
D-BOX  
DMT  
ASA  
AWA  
PIONEER  
PROMAX  
PROSCAN  
RCA  
0880  
0482  
0419, 0593  
0170, 0419, 0593,  
0882  
0227  
0750, 1154  
1102  
ACURA  
ADDISON  
ADMIRAL  
ADVENT  
AIKO  
0066, 1116, 1216,  
1316  
MICROMEGA 1216  
MUSICMAGIC  
1116  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
NORCENT  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,  
1790  
DNT  
0227, 0423  
DAERYUNG 0423  
RFT  
0227  
0119  
DAEWOO  
DIGENIUS  
DIRECTV  
1323  
0326  
0274, 0419, 0593,  
0666, 0751, 0776,  
0846, 1103, 1136,  
1169, 1776, 1883  
RADIOSHACK  
AKAI  
0036, 0057, 0235,  
0388, 0543, 0729,  
0839  
0291  
0036, 0064, 0398,  
0695  
1216  
0347  
1416  
0162, 0869, 1325  
0558, 1050  
0896  
RADIOLA  
RADIX  
SKY  
0227  
0423  
0874, 0883, 1202  
AKURA  
ALBA  
SM ELECTRONIC  
1227  
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM  
0802, 1032  
AMERICA ACTION 0207  
AMPRO  
SABRE  
0482  
0778  
PHILIPS  
1116, 1216, 1293,  
1295, 1296, 1310,  
1316  
0041, 0558, 1050,  
1411  
DISHPRO  
0802, 1032  
SAGEM  
SAMSUNG  
0847, 1141, 1280  
1044, 1136, 1303,  
1319  
AMSTRAD  
0036, 0064, 0198,  
0398, 0439, 0460,  
0543  
DISTRATEL 0111  
DREAM MULTIMEDIA  
1264  
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,  
0802, 0880, 0898,  
1032, 1113  
ENGEL  
EXPRESSVU 0802  
FTE  
FINLUX  
PIONEER  
SAT CONTROL  
ANAM  
ANAM NATIONAL  
0036, 0207, 0277  
1327  
POLK AUDIO 1316  
SATSTATION 1110  
SCHWAIGER 1138  
SEEMANN  
SIEMENS  
SONY  
0277, 0677  
0036  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
RCA  
1281  
0066  
0558, 1050, 1281,  
1417, 1636,  
0558  
ANITECH  
APEX DIGITAL  
1044  
0423  
0200  
0666, 0874, 1666  
0775, 0792, 0794  
0890  
0482  
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136  
BANG & OLUFSEN  
0592  
SABA  
SANSUI  
STAR CHOICE  
1116  
FRACARRO 0898  
0896  
SCHNEIDER 0558  
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,  
1685, 1785  
STEREOPHONICS  
1050  
FUBA  
GE  
GOI  
0423  
0593  
0802  
0890, 1138  
STRONG  
TPS  
TANTEC  
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127  
TELESTAR  
THOMSON  
1327  
0847, 1280  
0482  
BASIC  
BAUR  
BAYSONIC  
0036  
0064, 0388, 0539  
0207  
GALAXIS  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
0896  
GOLD BOX  
GRUNDIG  
HTS  
BEAUMARK 0205  
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,  
0742  
BELL & HOWELL  
0181  
0064  
BLAUPUNKT 0222  
1127  
0482, 0880, 1073,  
1318  
1233  
0776, 0817, 1776  
SUNFIRE  
TEAC  
1340  
1417  
0880  
0200, 0874  
0802  
TECHNICS  
0066, 1335, 1336,  
1545  
TOPFIELD  
TOSHIBA  
ULTIMATETV  
BEON  
TELEFUNKEN  
HIRSCHMANN  
0558  
1281  
1216  
0558  
1417  
0101  
0041, 0185  
0203, 1203, 1358,  
2601, 2608, 2609,  
2611  
0200, 0423  
0482, 0846  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM  
0776, 1169, 1776  
0419, 0666  
0749, 0751  
UNIVERSUM 0200  
BLUE SKY  
BONDSTEC 0274  
BRADFORD 0207  
BRANDT  
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490  
0695, 1064  
THOMSON  
THORENS  
UHER  
VENTURER  
VICTOR  
HITACHI  
UNIDEN  
VENTANA  
WISI  
XSAT  
ZEHNDER  
ZENITH  
0227  
0200, 0423, 0482  
0150  
1102  
0883, 1883  
0136, 0362  
HUMAX  
INVIDEO  
JVC  
0890, 1203  
0898  
0802  
0150, 0200, 0227,  
0276, 0685, 1248  
BUSH  
0036, 0064, 0398,  
0401, 0695, 1064  
WARDS  
YAMAHA  
KATHREIN  
CCE  
CGE  
CTC  
CXC  
0064  
0274  
0274  
0207  
0057  
KREISELMEYER  
0200  
TAPE DECK  
(TUNER ID1) 2602  
(TUNER ID2) 2610  
LABGEAR  
LOGIX  
1323  
1044  
AIWA  
CARVER  
GRUNDIG  
0056  
0056  
0056  
CANDLE  
CARNIVALE 0057  
CARVER  
CASCADE  
(IPOD)  
2606  
LORENZEN 0326  
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751  
0081, 0197  
0036  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATHAY  
CELEBRITY 0027  
CELERA 0792  
CENTURION 0064  
CHANGHONG  
0792  
0064  
FUTURETECH  
GE  
KNEISSEL  
KOLIN  
KORPEL  
KOYODA  
L&S ELECTRONIC  
0835  
LG  
0286, 0462  
0080, 0135, 0207  
0064  
NORDMENDE  
0207  
0136, 0314, 0587  
0190, 0388  
0207, 0460  
0181, 0193, 0277,  
0677  
0057, 0074, 0078,  
0119, 0205, 0207,  
0478, 0587, 1174,  
1374, 1481  
0064, 0543  
1782, 1783  
0036  
OCEANIC  
ONWA  
OPTIMUS  
0036  
CHING TAI  
CHUN YUN  
0036, 0119  
0027, 0036, 0119,  
0207  
GEC  
0057, 0064, 0087,  
OPTONICA  
ORION  
0120  
GATEWAY  
GELOSO  
GENEXXA  
0135, 0205, 0741  
0074, 0081, 0181,  
0183, 0205  
0064, 0263, 0347,  
0490, 0543  
0291, 0439  
LXI  
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207  
0190  
OSAKI  
CIMLINE  
CINERAL  
CITIZEN  
CLARION  
CLARIVOX  
0036  
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057  
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,  
0181, 0205, 0404  
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,  
0661  
LEYCO  
LIESENK & TTER  
0064  
LOEWE  
LUXOR  
0064, 0291  
OTTO VERSAND  
0064, 0347, 0539,  
0119, 0478  
0057, 0087, 0119  
0207  
0583  
0539  
0383, 0388  
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445  
0064  
PANAMA  
0291  
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397  
GOREMJE  
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197  
GRAETZ  
GRANADA  
0397  
M ELECTRONIC  
0036, 0064, 0131,  
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,  
0190, 0277, 0677,  
1437  
PATHE CINEMA  
0265, 0347  
CONDOR  
CONRAC  
CONTEC  
CRAIG  
0347, 0397  
0835  
0036, 0207  
0207  
0190, 0388  
0064, 0235, 0366,  
0543  
0132, 0136, 0190,  
0314, 0373, 0401,  
0507  
CROSLEY  
CROWN  
0081  
0036, 0064, 0207,  
0397, 0445  
GRANDIN  
GRUNDIG  
0637  
MGA  
MTC  
MAGNADYNE  
0057, 0177, 0205  
0057, 0087, 0539  
PAUSA  
PENNEY  
0036  
0064, 0222, 0514,  
0583, 0614  
0207  
0057, 0074, 0078,  
0087, 0183, 0205,  
1374  
CURTIS MATHES  
057, 0074, 0081,  
GRUNPY  
HCM  
HALLMARK 0205  
HANKOOK  
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,  
0455, 0583  
HANTAREX 0543  
HARMAN/KARDON  
0081  
HARVARD  
HAVERMY  
HELLO KITTY  
0274, 0543  
0036, 0439  
MAGNAFON 0543  
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,  
1481  
MANESTH  
MARANTZ  
PERDIO  
PHILCO  
0347  
0087, 0120, 0172,  
0181, 0193, 0478,  
0729, 1174, 1374  
0036, 0057, 0064,  
0119, 0135, 0181,  
0197, 0205, 0207,  
0401, 0478, 0650,  
0661, 1688  
0064  
0057, 0064, 0081,  
0172, 0205, 0207,  
0274, 0490, 1688  
0027, 0057, 0064,  
0078, 0081, 0119,  
0135, 0205, 0401,  
0583, 0717, 1481  
0064  
0057, 0205, 0207  
0291, 0347  
0057, 0064, 0081,  
0583  
0064  
0036, 0064, 0235,  
0398, 0514, 0543  
DAEWOO  
PHILIPS  
MARK  
MATSUI  
0207  
0120  
PHONOLA  
PILOT  
PIONEER  
DANSAI  
DAYTON  
DE GRAAF  
DECCA  
DENON  
DIGATRON  
DIXI  
DUMONT  
DWIN  
ECE  
ELBE  
ELECTROBAND  
0027  
ELIN  
ELITE  
MATSUSHITA  
0057  
0036  
0277, 0677  
0136, 0190, 0193,  
0314, 0706, 0787,  
0893  
0235, 0575  
0064, 0543  
0172  
0064  
0036, 0064  
0044  
0747, 0801  
0064  
0286  
0478  
0036, 0064  
0482  
0036, 0057, 0119,  
0132, 0136, 0172,  
0190, 0205, 0252,  
0383, 0508, 0575,  
0605, 1172, 1283  
0036  
MEDIATOR 0064  
MEDION  
MEGATRON 0172, 0205  
MEMOREX  
HINARI  
HISAWA  
HITACHI  
0695, 0835, 1064  
PORTLAND 0119  
PRANDONI-PRINCE  
0543  
PRIMA  
PRISM  
PROFEX  
PROSCAN  
PROTECH  
0036, 0177, 0181,  
0205, 0277, 0490,  
1064  
0474  
0788  
0078  
METZ  
MICROMAXX  
0036, 0388  
0074  
0036, 0064, 0274,  
0291, 0445, 0695  
0036, 0057, 0205  
0044  
0078, 0277, 0677  
0064, 0131, 0388,  
0539  
HUA TUN  
HUANYU  
HYPSON  
ICE  
ITS  
ITT  
IMPERIAL  
INDIANA  
INFINITY  
INGELEN  
INNO HIT  
INNOVA  
INTEQ  
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,  
0388, 0539  
INTERVISION  
0835  
0401  
MICROSTAR 0835  
0064, 0291  
0291, 0398  
0398  
0190, 0388, 0575  
0274, 0397, 0445  
0064  
0081  
0190  
0543  
0064  
MIDLAND  
MINERVA  
MINOKA  
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,  
0177, 0181, 0205,  
0044, 0074, 0078  
0514  
0439  
0064, 0575  
0347  
0036  
0181, 0205, 0207,  
0263, 0388, 0490,  
0650  
0057,0840  
0860  
PROTON  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
QUELLE  
ELTA  
EMERSON  
0207, 0263, 0277,  
0539, 0863, 1277  
0318,0319, 0543,  
0636  
R-LINE  
RCA  
0064  
ENVISION  
EPSON  
ERRES  
ETHER  
ETRON  
EUROPHON 0543  
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,  
0265, 0314, 0362,  
MIVAR  
0027, 0057, 0074,  
0117, 0119, 0205,  
0706, 1074, 1174,  
1274, 1374, 1474,  
1481, 1574  
0455  
0064  
0036, 0057  
0036  
MOTOROLA 0120  
MULTITECH 0036, 0207  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
0044  
0583  
0183, 0205, 0388,  
0893  
0036, 0057, 0078,  
0181, 0183, 0197,  
0205, 0482, 0524,  
1731  
RFT  
RADIOSHACK  
0064, 0291, 0404  
0081  
0027  
NEC  
0057, 0074, 0181,  
0205, 0207  
0064  
0587  
0388  
JBL  
JCB  
JVC  
FIDELITY  
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373  
FINLUX  
RADIOLA  
RADIOMARELLI  
0543  
0080, 0398, 0490,  
0680, 0710  
0036, 0078, 0119,  
0183, 0263  
0788  
0207  
0057, 0207  
0036  
0190  
0637  
0583  
0064  
0064, 0131, 0132,  
NEI  
NTC  
NECKERMANN  
0064  
0119  
0373, 0543  
0036, 0263  
0036, 0274, 0695  
0131, 0181, 0235,  
0397  
0482  
0064, 0347  
0120  
JEAN  
REALISTIC  
0057, 0181, 0205,  
0207  
FIRSTAR  
FIRSTLINE  
FISHER  
JENSEN  
KEC  
KTV  
KAISUI  
KAPSCH  
KARCHER  
KATHREIN  
KENDO  
KENWOOD  
0064, 0583  
0064  
0036, 0119, 0120,  
0205  
0064, 0291  
0057, 0119, 0205  
0388, 0500, 0507,  
0575, 0658  
0775, 0851  
REDIFFUSION  
NETSAT  
NEWAVE  
0388  
0741  
0064  
0190, 0286, 0291  
REOC  
REVOX  
REX  
FLINT  
FORMENTI  
FORTRESS  
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
NIKKAI  
NIKKO  
NOKIA  
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445  
RUNCO  
0044, 0057, 0524,  
0630  
0064  
0710, 0836  
0207, 0198, 0291  
0057  
NORCENT  
SBR  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEG  
SEI  
SKY  
SSS  
0291, 0695  
0543  
0064  
0207  
0136, 0190, 0314,  
0362  
0265  
0637  
0036, 0291, 0543  
0190, 0380, 0388,  
0575  
TAI YI  
0036  
0120, 0190  
0119, 0677  
0036, 0064, 0078,  
0081, 0087, 0181,  
0183, 0543  
0036, 0064, 0291,  
0439, 0445, 0482,  
0695, 1064  
FIDELITY  
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131  
FINLUX  
0027  
VCR  
ASA  
ADMIRAL  
ADVENTURA 0027  
AIKO  
AIWA  
TANDY  
TASHIKO  
TATUNG  
0064, 0108  
0075  
0027, 0069, 0108,  
0131  
SABA  
FIRSTLINE  
0064, 0070, 0072,  
0099  
0074, 0131  
0060, 0062  
0027, 0072  
0027  
0062, 0087, 0267,  
0834, 1062, 1087  
0108  
0305  
SACCS  
TEAC  
TEC  
TECHNEMA 0347  
TECHNICS  
0027, 0064, 0334,  
0375, 0379  
0068, 0342  
0099  
0099, 0305, 0342,  
0379  
FISHER  
FUJI  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
GE  
SAGEM  
SAISHO  
SALORA  
AKAI  
AKIBA  
ALBA  
0274  
SAMBERS  
SAMPO  
0543  
0078, 0277, 0677  
0036, 0057, 0119,  
0120, 0181, 0198,  
0205, 0677, 1782  
0036, 0057, 0064,  
0087, 0117, 0119,  
0181, 0205, 0291,  
0397, 0583, 0614,  
0645, 0729, 0793,  
0839, 0841  
0478  
TECHWOOD 0078  
TECO  
AMERICA ACTION  
0305  
AMERICAN HIGH  
0062  
AMSTRAD  
ANAM  
GEC  
0036, 0078, 0119,  
0120, 0205, 0291,  
0680  
0081, 0087, 0119,  
0177, 0207  
GARRARD  
GENERAL  
GO VIDEO  
GOLDHAND 0099  
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,  
1264  
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,  
0305  
GRADIENTE 0027  
0027  
0072  
0459  
SAMSUNG  
TEKNIKA  
0027  
0064, 0253, 0267,  
0305, 0507  
TELEFUNKEN  
0136, 0289, 0362,  
0652, 0729  
ANAM NATIONAL  
0253, 1589  
0099  
SANSEI  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
TELEMEISTER  
ANITECH  
ASHA  
0490  
0131, 0181, 0207,  
0235, 0366, 0826  
0347  
0036  
0347  
0057  
0136, 0314, 0587,  
0652, 1474  
0064, 0131, 0388,  
0539  
0087, 0181, 0183,  
0535, 0645, 0677,  
0859, 1283, 1383,  
1683, 1731  
0543  
0267  
0064  
GRAETZ  
0068, 0131, 0267  
0108, 0131  
0027, 0064, 0099  
0099, 0108, 0253,  
0374  
TELETECH  
TENSAI  
TERA  
ASUKA  
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305  
BAIRD  
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305  
BEAUMARK 0267  
BELL & HOWELL  
0131  
BLAUPUNKT 0253  
BRANDT  
BRANDT ELECTRONIC  
0068  
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506  
BUSH  
CCE  
GRANADA  
GRANDIN  
GRUNDIG  
SCHAUB LORENZ  
0027, 0068, 0131  
0388  
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,  
0695  
SCOTCH  
SCOTT  
SEARS  
THOMSON  
HCM  
HI-Q  
0099  
0074  
THORN  
0205  
HANSEATIC 0064  
HARLEY DAVIDSON  
0027  
HARMAN/KARDON  
0108  
HARWOOD  
HINARI  
HITACHI  
0205, 0207, 0263  
0074, 0081, 0181,  
0183, 0198, 0205  
0190, 0286  
0207  
TOSHIBA  
0347  
SELECO  
SEMIVOX  
SEMP  
SHARP  
SHEN YING 0036, 0119  
TRIUMPH  
TUNTEX  
UHER  
0099  
0183  
0057, 0120, 0677  
0036, 0057, 0119  
0347  
0099, 0305, 0379  
0099, 0305  
0027  
0099, 0267, 0379  
0027, 0064, 0068,  
0069, 0267  
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,  
CGE  
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263  
0291, 0373, 0397,  
CALIX  
CANON  
CARVER  
CIMLINE  
CINERAL  
CITIZEN  
COLT  
0064  
0062  
0108  
0099  
0305  
0064, 0305, 1305  
0099  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
0069  
SIAREM  
0543  
0519  
VECTOR RESEARCH  
0057  
SIEMENS  
SINUDYNE  
SKANTIC  
SKYGIANT  
0064, 0222  
0543  
0383  
HYPSON  
ITT  
ITV  
0099  
0068, 0131, 0267  
0064, 0305  
0027  
VESTEL  
VICTOR  
0064  
0080, 0277, 0677,  
0680  
0274  
0081  
0205  
0207  
IMPERIAL  
SKYWORTH 0064  
INTERFUNK 0108  
SOLAVOX  
SONITRON  
SONOKO  
SONOLOR  
SONTEC  
SONY  
0190  
0235  
VIDEOSAT  
VIDIKRON  
VIDTECH  
COMBITECH 0379  
CRAIG  
JVC  
0068, 0072, 0094  
0064, 0074, 0099,  
0267  
0099, 0305  
JENSEN  
KEC  
KLH  
0068  
0064, 0305  
0099  
0036, 0064  
0190, 0235  
0064  
0027, 0677, 0861,  
1127, 1532, 1678  
VIEWSONIC 1782  
CROWN  
CURTIS MATHES  
0062, 0068, 0087,  
VISION  
0347  
0190  
0383  
0057, 0081, 0205,  
0893  
KAISUI  
KENWOOD  
KODAK  
KOLIN  
KORPEL  
LG  
0099  
VOXSON  
WALTHAM  
WARDS  
0068, 0094  
0062, 0064  
0068, 0070  
0099  
0064, 0069, 0072,  
0507  
1062  
SOUNDESIGN  
SOUNDWAVE  
SOWA  
CYBERNEX 0267  
CYRUS  
DAEWOO  
0205, 0207  
0108  
WATSON  
WAYCON  
0064, 0347  
0183  
0072, 0131, 0305,  
0669, 1305  
0099  
0069  
0027, 0108  
0069  
0064, 0445  
0078, 0087, 0119,  
0183, 0205  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
0064, 0347, 0490,  
DANSAI  
DE GRAAF  
DECCA  
DENON  
DUAL  
DUMONT  
DYNATECH 0027  
ESC  
ELCATECH  
ELECTROHOME  
0064  
ELECTROPHONIC  
0064  
EMEREX  
EMERSON  
LXI  
0064  
LENCO  
LEYCO  
LLOYD’S  
LOEWE  
LOGIK  
LUXOR  
0305  
0099  
0027  
0064, 0108, 1589  
0099, 0267  
0070, 0075, 0131  
SQUAREVIEW  
0650  
0198  
YAMAHA  
0057, 0172, 0677,  
0796, 0860,  
2900  
(PROJECTOR),  
2901  
(PROJECTOR),  
2904  
(PROJECTOR)  
0277  
STANDARD 0036  
0068  
0027, 0108, 0131  
STARLITE  
STERN  
SUPREME  
SYLVANIA  
0207  
0190, 0286  
0027  
0267, 0305  
0099  
M ELECTRONIC  
0027  
0057, 0081, 0198  
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207  
MEI  
0062  
SYNCO  
0027, 0087, 0119,  
MGA  
0070, 0267  
0120, 0205, 0478  
YAPSHE  
YOKO  
ZENITH  
MGN TECHNOLOGY  
0267  
SYSLINE  
T + A  
0064  
0474  
0064, 0291  
0044, 0119, 0205,  
0490  
0059  
MTC  
0027, 0267  
TCM  
0835  
0027, 0062, 0064,  
0070, 0072, 0211,  
0267, 0305, 1305,  
1506  
MAGNASONIC  
TMK  
0205  
1305  
TNCI  
0044  
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,  
0108, 1808  
TVS  
0490  
TACICO  
0036, 0119, 0205  
FERGUSON 0068, 0347  
MAGNIN  
0267  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MANESTH  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MATSUI  
MATSUSHITA  
0072, 0099  
0062, 0108  
0064  
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,  
0643, 1062, 1589  
PATHE MARCONI 0068  
SABA  
0068, 0347  
0070  
TECHNICS  
TECO  
0062, 0253  
0062, 0064, 0068,  
0075  
0027, 0062, 0064  
0068  
0068, 0347  
0099  
0027  
0027  
0068, 0087, 0094,  
0347  
0068, 0131  
0645, 0663  
0068, 0070, 0072,  
0094, 0108, 0872  
SALORA  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
SANKY  
SANSUI  
0064, 0075  
0072, 0267, 0459  
0066, 0075  
0027, 0068, 0094,  
1506  
0375, 0379  
PENNEY  
0062, 0064, 0069,  
0267, 1062, 1264  
0069  
0027  
0062  
0062, 0108, 0645,  
1108, 1208  
0108  
TEKNIKA  
TELEAVIA  
TELEFUNKEN  
TENOSAL  
TENSAI  
0062  
0375  
PENTAX  
PERDIO  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
MEDION  
MEMOREX  
0027, 0062, 0064,  
0066, 0074, 0075,  
0131, 0267, 0334,  
0375, 1264  
0099  
SANYO  
SAVILLE  
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,  
0131  
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108  
0074, 0131, 0267  
0379  
THOMAS  
THOMSON  
PHONOLA  
PILOT  
MEMPHIS  
METZ  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,  
0108, 0834  
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075  
MULTITECH 0027, 0099  
MURPHY  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
0064  
THORN  
TIVO  
TOSHIBA  
0064, 0374, 1589  
0069  
PIONEER  
0069, 0094, 0108  
SCOTT  
SEARS  
0070, 0072, 0211  
0027, 0062, 0064,  
0069, 0074, 0131,  
1264  
0068  
0072  
0075, 0834  
0099, 0131  
0064, 0108, 0131  
0064  
0072, 0099  
0108  
POLK AUDIO 0108  
PROFITRONIC  
0267  
PROLINE  
PROSCAN  
PROTEC  
PULSAR  
PYE  
0027  
0087, 1087  
0099  
0066  
0108  
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267  
UHER  
UNITECH  
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,  
0267  
VECTOR  
VICTOR  
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072  
VIDEOMAGIC  
VIDEOSONIC 0267  
SELECO  
SEMP  
SHARP  
SHINTOM  
SIEMENS  
SILVA  
SINGER  
SINUDYNE  
0267  
0267  
0027  
0108  
0131  
0062, 0064, 0068,  
0075, 0094, 0131  
0253  
QUASAR  
QUELLE  
RCA  
0062, 1062  
0108  
0062, 0069, 0087,  
0267, 0834, 1062,  
1087  
0072  
0068, 0094  
NEC  
NATIONAL  
NECKERMANN  
NESCO  
NEWAVE  
NIKKO  
0064  
0108  
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643  
SONTEC  
SONY  
0099  
0064  
0064  
0267  
RADIOSHACK  
RADIOLA  
RADIX  
0027  
0064  
VILLAIN  
WARDS  
0027  
0108  
0064  
0027, 0059, 0060,  
0062, 0663, 1259  
0375  
0027, 0062, 0069,  
0074, 0075, 0087,  
0099, 0108, 0267  
NOBLEX  
RANDEX  
0064  
SUNKAI  
NOKIA  
0068, 0131, 0267  
0068, 0347  
0027, 0068  
0342, 0375  
0062, 0253  
0064, 0075, 0131,  
0459  
0211, 0375, 0379,  
1506  
0027, 0064, 0099  
REALISTIC  
0027, 0062, 0064,  
0074, 0075, 0131  
0375  
0641, 0643  
0068  
SUNSTAR  
0027  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
0099  
NORDMENDE  
OCEANIC  
OKANO  
OLYMPUS  
OPTIMUS  
SUNTRONIC 0027  
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,  
0070, 1808  
SYMPHONIC 0027  
REOC  
REPLAYTV  
REX  
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,  
0305  
RUNCO  
SBR  
SEG  
SEI  
STS  
XR-1000  
YAMAHA  
YAMISHI  
YOKAN  
YOKO  
0027, 0062, 0099  
0068  
0099  
0099  
TMK  
0267  
TANDY  
TASHIKO  
TATUNG  
0027, 0131  
0027, 0064  
0027, 0068, 0072,  
0094, 0108  
0027, 0068, 0305,  
0334, 0669  
0267  
ORION  
OSAKI  
0066  
0108  
0267  
0108  
0069  
ZENITH  
0027, 0060, 0066,  
1506  
OTTO VERSAND  
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099  
0108  
TEAC  
© 2008  
All rights reserved.  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.  
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND  
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN  
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA  
Printed in Malaysia  
WN24810  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
DSP-AX863SE/DSP-AX763  
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.  
Front panel  
A
B
VOLUME  
SPEAKERS  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
1
D
E
2
3
4
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
TUNER  
A
B
C
-
V AUX/DOCK DTV/CBL  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
PHONO  
5
DVD  
DVR  
VCR  
SELECT  
6
7
AMP  
+
+
TV VOL  
+
TV CH  
SOURCE  
F
G
VOLUME  
TV  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
PRESET/CH  
H
I
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
AUDIO  
8
9
0
SRCH MODE  
O
PURE DIRECT  
ENTER  
J
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
STRAIGHT  
RETURN  
K
L
LIVE/CLUB  
MEMORY  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
LIVE/CLUB  
CLASSICAL  
1
ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE PARAMETER  
8
5
6
7
A
MULTI CH IN  
0
9
MULTI CH IN  
SLEEP  
ENT  
0
+10  
9
M
N
INFO  
EON  
MODE- PTY SEEK- START  
Q
P
R
B
C
REC  
MACRO LEARN CLEAR  
OFF ON  
RENAME  
Printed in Malaysia  
WN26080  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weed Eater Trimmer 530086924 User Manual
Wells Griddle WVG 136, WVG 136RW User Manual
Westinghouse Flat Panel Television LCD TV User Manual
Westinghouse Outdoor Ceiling Fan 78179 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer CAM2762TQ0 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer WTW6200SW2 User Manual
Wintal TV Receiver STB1HD User Manual
X10 Wireless Technology Tablet AIRPAD 1 User Manual
Zanussi Dishwasher ZT 6910 User Manual
Zenoah Brush Cutter BC260DL User Manual